Remove TARGET_INVALID_PARAMETER_TYPE and TARGET_INVALID_RETURN_TYPE hooks.
[gcc.git] / gcc / doc / tm.texi.in
1 @c Copyright (C) 1988-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
2 @c This is part of the GCC manual.
3 @c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi.
4
5 @node Target Macros
6 @chapter Target Description Macros and Functions
7 @cindex machine description macros
8 @cindex target description macros
9 @cindex macros, target description
10 @cindex @file{tm.h} macros
11
12 In addition to the file @file{@var{machine}.md}, a machine description
13 includes a C header file conventionally given the name
14 @file{@var{machine}.h} and a C source file named @file{@var{machine}.c}.
15 The header file defines numerous macros that convey the information
16 about the target machine that does not fit into the scheme of the
17 @file{.md} file. The file @file{tm.h} should be a link to
18 @file{@var{machine}.h}. The header file @file{config.h} includes
19 @file{tm.h} and most compiler source files include @file{config.h}. The
20 source file defines a variable @code{targetm}, which is a structure
21 containing pointers to functions and data relating to the target
22 machine. @file{@var{machine}.c} should also contain their definitions,
23 if they are not defined elsewhere in GCC, and other functions called
24 through the macros defined in the @file{.h} file.
25
26 @menu
27 * Target Structure:: The @code{targetm} variable.
28 * Driver:: Controlling how the driver runs the compilation passes.
29 * Run-time Target:: Defining @samp{-m} options like @option{-m68000} and @option{-m68020}.
30 * Per-Function Data:: Defining data structures for per-function information.
31 * Storage Layout:: Defining sizes and alignments of data.
32 * Type Layout:: Defining sizes and properties of basic user data types.
33 * Registers:: Naming and describing the hardware registers.
34 * Register Classes:: Defining the classes of hardware registers.
35 * Stack and Calling:: Defining which way the stack grows and by how much.
36 * Varargs:: Defining the varargs macros.
37 * Trampolines:: Code set up at run time to enter a nested function.
38 * Library Calls:: Controlling how library routines are implicitly called.
39 * Addressing Modes:: Defining addressing modes valid for memory operands.
40 * Anchored Addresses:: Defining how @option{-fsection-anchors} should work.
41 * Condition Code:: Defining how insns update the condition code.
42 * Costs:: Defining relative costs of different operations.
43 * Scheduling:: Adjusting the behavior of the instruction scheduler.
44 * Sections:: Dividing storage into text, data, and other sections.
45 * PIC:: Macros for position independent code.
46 * Assembler Format:: Defining how to write insns and pseudo-ops to output.
47 * Debugging Info:: Defining the format of debugging output.
48 * Floating Point:: Handling floating point for cross-compilers.
49 * Mode Switching:: Insertion of mode-switching instructions.
50 * Target Attributes:: Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}.
51 * Emulated TLS:: Emulated TLS support.
52 * MIPS Coprocessors:: MIPS coprocessor support and how to customize it.
53 * PCH Target:: Validity checking for precompiled headers.
54 * C++ ABI:: Controlling C++ ABI changes.
55 * Named Address Spaces:: Adding support for named address spaces
56 * Misc:: Everything else.
57 @end menu
58
59 @node Target Structure
60 @section The Global @code{targetm} Variable
61 @cindex target hooks
62 @cindex target functions
63
64 @deftypevar {struct gcc_target} targetm
65 The target @file{.c} file must define the global @code{targetm} variable
66 which contains pointers to functions and data relating to the target
67 machine. The variable is declared in @file{target.h};
68 @file{target-def.h} defines the macro @code{TARGET_INITIALIZER} which is
69 used to initialize the variable, and macros for the default initializers
70 for elements of the structure. The @file{.c} file should override those
71 macros for which the default definition is inappropriate. For example:
72 @smallexample
73 #include "target.h"
74 #include "target-def.h"
75
76 /* @r{Initialize the GCC target structure.} */
77
78 #undef TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
79 #define TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES @var{machine}_comp_type_attributes
80
81 struct gcc_target targetm = TARGET_INITIALIZER;
82 @end smallexample
83 @end deftypevar
84
85 Where a macro should be defined in the @file{.c} file in this manner to
86 form part of the @code{targetm} structure, it is documented below as a
87 ``Target Hook'' with a prototype. Many macros will change in future
88 from being defined in the @file{.h} file to being part of the
89 @code{targetm} structure.
90
91 Similarly, there is a @code{targetcm} variable for hooks that are
92 specific to front ends for C-family languages, documented as ``C
93 Target Hook''. This is declared in @file{c-family/c-target.h}, the
94 initializer @code{TARGETCM_INITIALIZER} in
95 @file{c-family/c-target-def.h}. If targets initialize @code{targetcm}
96 themselves, they should set @code{target_has_targetcm=yes} in
97 @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a default definition is used.
98
99 Similarly, there is a @code{targetm_common} variable for hooks that
100 are shared between the compiler driver and the compilers proper,
101 documented as ``Common Target Hook''. This is declared in
102 @file{common/common-target.h}, the initializer
103 @code{TARGETM_COMMON_INITIALIZER} in
104 @file{common/common-target-def.h}. If targets initialize
105 @code{targetm_common} themselves, they should set
106 @code{target_has_targetm_common=yes} in @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a
107 default definition is used.
108
109 @node Driver
110 @section Controlling the Compilation Driver, @file{gcc}
111 @cindex driver
112 @cindex controlling the compilation driver
113
114 @c prevent bad page break with this line
115 You can control the compilation driver.
116
117 @defmac DRIVER_SELF_SPECS
118 A list of specs for the driver itself. It should be a suitable
119 initializer for an array of strings, with no surrounding braces.
120
121 The driver applies these specs to its own command line between loading
122 default @file{specs} files (but not command-line specified ones) and
123 choosing the multilib directory or running any subcommands. It
124 applies them in the order given, so each spec can depend on the
125 options added by earlier ones. It is also possible to remove options
126 using @samp{%<@var{option}} in the usual way.
127
128 This macro can be useful when a port has several interdependent target
129 options. It provides a way of standardizing the command line so
130 that the other specs are easier to write.
131
132 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
133 @end defmac
134
135 @defmac OPTION_DEFAULT_SPECS
136 A list of specs used to support configure-time default options (i.e.@:
137 @option{--with} options) in the driver. It should be a suitable initializer
138 for an array of structures, each containing two strings, without the
139 outermost pair of surrounding braces.
140
141 The first item in the pair is the name of the default. This must match
142 the code in @file{config.gcc} for the target. The second item is a spec
143 to apply if a default with this name was specified. The string
144 @samp{%(VALUE)} in the spec will be replaced by the value of the default
145 everywhere it occurs.
146
147 The driver will apply these specs to its own command line between loading
148 default @file{specs} files and processing @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}, using
149 the same mechanism as @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}.
150
151 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
152 @end defmac
153
154 @defmac CPP_SPEC
155 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
156 pass to CPP@. It can also specify how to translate options you
157 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the CPP@.
158
159 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
160 @end defmac
161
162 @defmac CPLUSPLUS_CPP_SPEC
163 This macro is just like @code{CPP_SPEC}, but is used for C++, rather
164 than C@. If you do not define this macro, then the value of
165 @code{CPP_SPEC} (if any) will be used instead.
166 @end defmac
167
168 @defmac CC1_SPEC
169 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
170 pass to @code{cc1}, @code{cc1plus}, @code{f771}, and the other language
171 front ends.
172 It can also specify how to translate options you give to GCC into options
173 for GCC to pass to front ends.
174
175 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
176 @end defmac
177
178 @defmac CC1PLUS_SPEC
179 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
180 pass to @code{cc1plus}. It can also specify how to translate options you
181 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the @code{cc1plus}.
182
183 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
184 Note that everything defined in CC1_SPEC is already passed to
185 @code{cc1plus} so there is no need to duplicate the contents of
186 CC1_SPEC in CC1PLUS_SPEC@.
187 @end defmac
188
189 @defmac ASM_SPEC
190 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
191 pass to the assembler. It can also specify how to translate options
192 you give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the assembler.
193 See the file @file{sun3.h} for an example of this.
194
195 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
196 @end defmac
197
198 @defmac ASM_FINAL_SPEC
199 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program how to
200 run any programs which cleanup after the normal assembler.
201 Normally, this is not needed. See the file @file{mips.h} for
202 an example of this.
203
204 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
205 @end defmac
206
207 @defmac AS_NEEDS_DASH_FOR_PIPED_INPUT
208 Define this macro, with no value, if the driver should give the assembler
209 an argument consisting of a single dash, @option{-}, to instruct it to
210 read from its standard input (which will be a pipe connected to the
211 output of the compiler proper). This argument is given after any
212 @option{-o} option specifying the name of the output file.
213
214 If you do not define this macro, the assembler is assumed to read its
215 standard input if given no non-option arguments. If your assembler
216 cannot read standard input at all, use a @samp{%@{pipe:%e@}} construct;
217 see @file{mips.h} for instance.
218 @end defmac
219
220 @defmac LINK_SPEC
221 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
222 pass to the linker. It can also specify how to translate options you
223 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the linker.
224
225 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
226 @end defmac
227
228 @defmac LIB_SPEC
229 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The difference
230 between the two is that @code{LIB_SPEC} is used at the end of the
231 command given to the linker.
232
233 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that
234 loads the standard C library from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
235 @end defmac
236
237 @defmac LIBGCC_SPEC
238 Another C string constant that tells the GCC driver program
239 how and when to place a reference to @file{libgcc.a} into the
240 linker command line. This constant is placed both before and after
241 the value of @code{LIB_SPEC}.
242
243 If this macro is not defined, the GCC driver provides a default that
244 passes the string @option{-lgcc} to the linker.
245 @end defmac
246
247 @defmac REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC
248 By default, if @code{ENABLE_SHARED_LIBGCC} is defined, the
249 @code{LIBGCC_SPEC} is not directly used by the driver program but is
250 instead modified to refer to different versions of @file{libgcc.a}
251 depending on the values of the command line flags @option{-static},
252 @option{-shared}, @option{-static-libgcc}, and @option{-shared-libgcc}. On
253 targets where these modifications are inappropriate, define
254 @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} instead. @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} tells the
255 driver how to place a reference to @file{libgcc} on the link command
256 line, but, unlike @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}, it is used unmodified.
257 @end defmac
258
259 @defmac USE_LD_AS_NEEDED
260 A macro that controls the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}
261 mentioned in @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}. If nonzero, a spec will be
262 generated that uses @option{--as-needed} or equivalent options and the
263 shared @file{libgcc} in place of the
264 static exception handler library, when linking without any of
265 @code{-static}, @code{-static-libgcc}, or @code{-shared-libgcc}.
266 @end defmac
267
268 @defmac LINK_EH_SPEC
269 If defined, this C string constant is added to @code{LINK_SPEC}.
270 When @code{USE_LD_AS_NEEDED} is zero or undefined, it also affects
271 the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC} mentioned in
272 @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}.
273 @end defmac
274
275 @defmac STARTFILE_SPEC
276 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
277 difference between the two is that @code{STARTFILE_SPEC} is used at
278 the very beginning of the command given to the linker.
279
280 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that loads the
281 standard C startup file from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
282 @end defmac
283
284 @defmac ENDFILE_SPEC
285 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
286 difference between the two is that @code{ENDFILE_SPEC} is used at
287 the very end of the command given to the linker.
288
289 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
290 @end defmac
291
292 @defmac THREAD_MODEL_SPEC
293 GCC @code{-v} will print the thread model GCC was configured to use.
294 However, this doesn't work on platforms that are multilibbed on thread
295 models, such as AIX 4.3. On such platforms, define
296 @code{THREAD_MODEL_SPEC} such that it evaluates to a string without
297 blanks that names one of the recognized thread models. @code{%*}, the
298 default value of this macro, will expand to the value of
299 @code{thread_file} set in @file{config.gcc}.
300 @end defmac
301
302 @defmac SYSROOT_SUFFIX_SPEC
303 Define this macro to add a suffix to the target sysroot when GCC is
304 configured with a sysroot. This will cause GCC to search for usr/lib,
305 et al, within sysroot+suffix.
306 @end defmac
307
308 @defmac SYSROOT_HEADERS_SUFFIX_SPEC
309 Define this macro to add a headers_suffix to the target sysroot when
310 GCC is configured with a sysroot. This will cause GCC to pass the
311 updated sysroot+headers_suffix to CPP, causing it to search for
312 usr/include, et al, within sysroot+headers_suffix.
313 @end defmac
314
315 @defmac EXTRA_SPECS
316 Define this macro to provide additional specifications to put in the
317 @file{specs} file that can be used in various specifications like
318 @code{CC1_SPEC}.
319
320 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures,
321 containing a string constant, that defines the specification name, and a
322 string constant that provides the specification.
323
324 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
325
326 @code{EXTRA_SPECS} is useful when an architecture contains several
327 related targets, which have various @code{@dots{}_SPECS} which are similar
328 to each other, and the maintainer would like one central place to keep
329 these definitions.
330
331 For example, the PowerPC System V.4 targets use @code{EXTRA_SPECS} to
332 define either @code{_CALL_SYSV} when the System V calling sequence is
333 used or @code{_CALL_AIX} when the older AIX-based calling sequence is
334 used.
335
336 The @file{config/rs6000/rs6000.h} target file defines:
337
338 @smallexample
339 #define EXTRA_SPECS \
340 @{ "cpp_sysv_default", CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT @},
341
342 #define CPP_SYS_DEFAULT ""
343 @end smallexample
344
345 The @file{config/rs6000/sysv.h} target file defines:
346 @smallexample
347 #undef CPP_SPEC
348 #define CPP_SPEC \
349 "%@{posix: -D_POSIX_SOURCE @} \
350 %@{mcall-sysv: -D_CALL_SYSV @} \
351 %@{!mcall-sysv: %(cpp_sysv_default) @} \
352 %@{msoft-float: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@} %@{mcpu=403: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@}"
353
354 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
355 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_SYSV"
356 @end smallexample
357
358 while the @file{config/rs6000/eabiaix.h} target file defines
359 @code{CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT} as:
360
361 @smallexample
362 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
363 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_AIX"
364 @end smallexample
365 @end defmac
366
367 @defmac LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
368 Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
369 @file{libgcc.a}. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
370 the argument @option{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search.
371 @end defmac
372
373 @defmac LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC
374 The sequence in which libgcc and libc are specified to the linker.
375 By default this is @code{%G %L %G}.
376 @end defmac
377
378 @defmac POST_LINK_SPEC
379 Define this macro to add additional steps to be executed after linker.
380 The default value of this macro is empty string.
381 @end defmac
382
383 @defmac LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
384 A C string constant giving the complete command line need to execute the
385 linker. When you do this, you will need to update your port each time a
386 change is made to the link command line within @file{gcc.c}. Therefore,
387 define this macro only if you need to completely redefine the command
388 line for invoking the linker and there is no other way to accomplish
389 the effect you need. Overriding this macro may be avoidable by overriding
390 @code{LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC} instead.
391 @end defmac
392
393 @hook TARGET_ALWAYS_STRIP_DOTDOT
394
395 @defmac MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
396 Define this macro as a C expression for the initializer of an array of
397 string to tell the driver program which options are defaults for this
398 target and thus do not need to be handled specially when using
399 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS}.
400
401 Do not define this macro if @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} is not defined in
402 the target makefile fragment or if none of the options listed in
403 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} are set by default.
404 @xref{Target Fragment}.
405 @end defmac
406
407 @defmac RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
408 Define this macro to tell @command{gcc} that it should only translate
409 a @option{-B} prefix into a @option{-L} linker option if the prefix
410 indicates an absolute file name.
411 @end defmac
412
413 @defmac MD_EXEC_PREFIX
414 If defined, this macro is an additional prefix to try after
415 @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched
416 when the compiler is built as a cross
417 compiler. If you define @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, then be sure to add it
418 to the list of directories used to find the assembler in @file{configure.ac}.
419 @end defmac
420
421 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
422 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
423 standard choice of @code{libdir} as the default prefix to
424 try when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
425 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX} is not searched when the compiler
426 is built as a cross compiler.
427 @end defmac
428
429 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
430 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
431 standard choice of @code{/lib} as a prefix to try after the default prefix
432 when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
433 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1} is not searched when the compiler
434 is built as a cross compiler.
435 @end defmac
436
437 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2
438 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
439 standard choice of @code{/lib} as yet another prefix to try after the
440 default prefix when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
441 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2} is not searched when the compiler
442 is built as a cross compiler.
443 @end defmac
444
445 @defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
446 If defined, this macro supplies an additional prefix to try after the
447 standard prefixes. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched when the
448 compiler is built as a cross compiler.
449 @end defmac
450
451 @defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
452 If defined, this macro supplies yet another prefix to try after the
453 standard prefixes. It is not searched when the compiler is built as a
454 cross compiler.
455 @end defmac
456
457 @defmac INIT_ENVIRONMENT
458 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to set environment
459 variables for programs called by the driver, such as the assembler and
460 loader. The driver passes the value of this macro to @code{putenv} to
461 initialize the necessary environment variables.
462 @end defmac
463
464 @defmac LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
465 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
466 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/include} as the default prefix to
467 try when searching for local header files. @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR}
468 comes before @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR} (set in
469 @file{config.gcc}, normally @file{/usr/include}) in the search order.
470
471 Cross compilers do not search either @file{/usr/local/include} or its
472 replacement.
473 @end defmac
474
475 @defmac NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_COMPONENT
476 The ``component'' corresponding to @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}.
477 See @code{INCLUDE_DEFAULTS}, below, for the description of components.
478 If you do not define this macro, no component is used.
479 @end defmac
480
481 @defmac INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
482 Define this macro if you wish to override the entire default search path
483 for include files. For a native compiler, the default search path
484 usually consists of @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR},
485 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}, and
486 @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}. In addition, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}
487 and @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR} are defined automatically by @file{Makefile},
488 and specify private search areas for GCC@. The directory
489 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR} is used only for C++ programs.
490
491 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures.
492 Each array element should have four elements: the directory name (a
493 string constant), the component name (also a string constant), a flag
494 for C++-only directories,
495 and a flag showing that the includes in the directory don't need to be
496 wrapped in @code{extern @samp{C}} when compiling C++. Mark the end of
497 the array with a null element.
498
499 The component name denotes what GNU package the include file is part of,
500 if any, in all uppercase letters. For example, it might be @samp{GCC}
501 or @samp{BINUTILS}. If the package is part of a vendor-supplied
502 operating system, code the component name as @samp{0}.
503
504 For example, here is the definition used for VAX/VMS:
505
506 @smallexample
507 #define INCLUDE_DEFAULTS \
508 @{ \
509 @{ "GNU_GXX_INCLUDE:", "G++", 1, 1@}, \
510 @{ "GNU_CC_INCLUDE:", "GCC", 0, 0@}, \
511 @{ "SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSLIB.]", 0, 0, 0@}, \
512 @{ ".", 0, 0, 0@}, \
513 @{ 0, 0, 0, 0@} \
514 @}
515 @end smallexample
516 @end defmac
517
518 Here is the order of prefixes tried for exec files:
519
520 @enumerate
521 @item
522 Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
523
524 @item
525 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or, if @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}
526 is not set and the compiler has not been installed in the configure-time
527 @var{prefix}, the location in which the compiler has actually been installed.
528
529 @item
530 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{COMPILER_PATH}.
531
532 @item
533 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if the compiler has been installed
534 in the configured-time @var{prefix}.
535
536 @item
537 The location @file{/usr/libexec/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
538
539 @item
540 The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
541
542 @item
543 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
544 compiler.
545 @end enumerate
546
547 Here is the order of prefixes tried for startfiles:
548
549 @enumerate
550 @item
551 Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
552
553 @item
554 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or its automatically determined
555 value based on the installed toolchain location.
556
557 @item
558 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{LIBRARY_PATH}
559 (or port-specific name; native only, cross compilers do not use this).
560
561 @item
562 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, but only if the toolchain is installed
563 in the configured @var{prefix} or this is a native compiler.
564
565 @item
566 The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
567
568 @item
569 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
570 compiler.
571
572 @item
573 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a
574 native compiler, or we have a target system root.
575
576 @item
577 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, if defined, but only if this is a
578 native compiler, or we have a target system root.
579
580 @item
581 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, with any sysroot modifications.
582 If this path is relative it will be prefixed by @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} and
583 the machine suffix or @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX} and the machine suffix.
584
585 @item
586 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, but only if this is a native
587 compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
588 @file{/lib/}.
589
590 @item
591 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2}, but only if this is a native
592 compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
593 @file{/usr/lib/}.
594 @end enumerate
595
596 @node Run-time Target
597 @section Run-time Target Specification
598 @cindex run-time target specification
599 @cindex predefined macros
600 @cindex target specifications
601
602 @c prevent bad page break with this line
603 Here are run-time target specifications.
604
605 @defmac TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS ()
606 This function-like macro expands to a block of code that defines
607 built-in preprocessor macros and assertions for the target CPU, using
608 the functions @code{builtin_define}, @code{builtin_define_std} and
609 @code{builtin_assert}. When the front end
610 calls this macro it provides a trailing semicolon, and since it has
611 finished command line option processing your code can use those
612 results freely.
613
614 @code{builtin_assert} takes a string in the form you pass to the
615 command-line option @option{-A}, such as @code{cpu=mips}, and creates
616 the assertion. @code{builtin_define} takes a string in the form
617 accepted by option @option{-D} and unconditionally defines the macro.
618
619 @code{builtin_define_std} takes a string representing the name of an
620 object-like macro. If it doesn't lie in the user's namespace,
621 @code{builtin_define_std} defines it unconditionally. Otherwise, it
622 defines a version with two leading underscores, and another version
623 with two leading and trailing underscores, and defines the original
624 only if an ISO standard was not requested on the command line. For
625 example, passing @code{unix} defines @code{__unix}, @code{__unix__}
626 and possibly @code{unix}; passing @code{_mips} defines @code{__mips},
627 @code{__mips__} and possibly @code{_mips}, and passing @code{_ABI64}
628 defines only @code{_ABI64}.
629
630 You can also test for the C dialect being compiled. The variable
631 @code{c_language} is set to one of @code{clk_c}, @code{clk_cplusplus}
632 or @code{clk_objective_c}. Note that if we are preprocessing
633 assembler, this variable will be @code{clk_c} but the function-like
634 macro @code{preprocessing_asm_p()} will return true, so you might want
635 to check for that first. If you need to check for strict ANSI, the
636 variable @code{flag_iso} can be used. The function-like macro
637 @code{preprocessing_trad_p()} can be used to check for traditional
638 preprocessing.
639 @end defmac
640
641 @defmac TARGET_OS_CPP_BUILTINS ()
642 Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
643 and is used for the target operating system instead.
644 @end defmac
645
646 @defmac TARGET_OBJFMT_CPP_BUILTINS ()
647 Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
648 and is used for the target object format. @file{elfos.h} uses this
649 macro to define @code{__ELF__}, so you probably do not need to define
650 it yourself.
651 @end defmac
652
653 @deftypevar {extern int} target_flags
654 This variable is declared in @file{options.h}, which is included before
655 any target-specific headers.
656 @end deftypevar
657
658 @hook TARGET_DEFAULT_TARGET_FLAGS
659 This variable specifies the initial value of @code{target_flags}.
660 Its default setting is 0.
661 @end deftypevr
662
663 @cindex optional hardware or system features
664 @cindex features, optional, in system conventions
665
666 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION
667 This hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
668 target-specific options described by the @file{.opt} definition files
669 (@pxref{Options}). It has the opportunity to do some option-specific
670 processing and should return true if the option is valid. The default
671 definition does nothing but return true.
672
673 @var{decoded} specifies the option and its arguments. @var{opts} and
674 @var{opts_set} are the @code{gcc_options} structures to be used for
675 storing option state, and @var{loc} is the location at which the
676 option was passed (@code{UNKNOWN_LOCATION} except for options passed
677 via attributes).
678 @end deftypefn
679
680 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION
681 This target hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
682 target-specific C language family options described by the @file{.opt}
683 definition files(@pxref{Options}). It has the opportunity to do some
684 option-specific processing and should return true if the option is
685 valid. The arguments are like for @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION}. The
686 default definition does nothing but return false.
687
688 In general, you should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION} to handle
689 options. However, if processing an option requires routines that are
690 only available in the C (and related language) front ends, then you
691 should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION} instead.
692 @end deftypefn
693
694 @hook TARGET_OBJC_CONSTRUCT_STRING_OBJECT
695
696 @hook TARGET_OBJC_DECLARE_UNRESOLVED_CLASS_REFERENCE
697
698 @hook TARGET_OBJC_DECLARE_CLASS_DEFINITION
699
700 @hook TARGET_STRING_OBJECT_REF_TYPE_P
701
702 @hook TARGET_CHECK_STRING_OBJECT_FORMAT_ARG
703
704 @hook TARGET_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS_AFTER_CHANGE
705
706 @defmac C_COMMON_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
707 This is similar to the @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE} hook
708 but is only used in the C
709 language frontends (C, Objective-C, C++, Objective-C++) and so can be
710 used to alter option flag variables which only exist in those
711 frontends.
712 @end defmac
713
714 @hook TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION_TABLE
715 Some machines may desire to change what optimizations are performed for
716 various optimization levels. This variable, if defined, describes
717 options to enable at particular sets of optimization levels. These
718 options are processed once
719 just after the optimization level is determined and before the remainder
720 of the command options have been parsed, so may be overridden by other
721 options passed explicitly.
722
723 This processing is run once at program startup and when the optimization
724 options are changed via @code{#pragma GCC optimize} or by using the
725 @code{optimize} attribute.
726 @end deftypevr
727
728 @hook TARGET_OPTION_INIT_STRUCT
729
730 @hook TARGET_OPTION_DEFAULT_PARAMS
731
732 @defmac SWITCHABLE_TARGET
733 Some targets need to switch between substantially different subtargets
734 during compilation. For example, the MIPS target has one subtarget for
735 the traditional MIPS architecture and another for MIPS16. Source code
736 can switch between these two subarchitectures using the @code{mips16}
737 and @code{nomips16} attributes.
738
739 Such subtargets can differ in things like the set of available
740 registers, the set of available instructions, the costs of various
741 operations, and so on. GCC caches a lot of this type of information
742 in global variables, and recomputing them for each subtarget takes a
743 significant amount of time. The compiler therefore provides a facility
744 for maintaining several versions of the global variables and quickly
745 switching between them; see @file{target-globals.h} for details.
746
747 Define this macro to 1 if your target needs this facility. The default
748 is 0.
749 @end defmac
750
751 @hook TARGET_FLOAT_EXCEPTIONS_ROUNDING_SUPPORTED_P
752
753 @node Per-Function Data
754 @section Defining data structures for per-function information.
755 @cindex per-function data
756 @cindex data structures
757
758 If the target needs to store information on a per-function basis, GCC
759 provides a macro and a couple of variables to allow this. Note, just
760 using statics to store the information is a bad idea, since GCC supports
761 nested functions, so you can be halfway through encoding one function
762 when another one comes along.
763
764 GCC defines a data structure called @code{struct function} which
765 contains all of the data specific to an individual function. This
766 structure contains a field called @code{machine} whose type is
767 @code{struct machine_function *}, which can be used by targets to point
768 to their own specific data.
769
770 If a target needs per-function specific data it should define the type
771 @code{struct machine_function} and also the macro @code{INIT_EXPANDERS}.
772 This macro should be used to initialize the function pointer
773 @code{init_machine_status}. This pointer is explained below.
774
775 One typical use of per-function, target specific data is to create an
776 RTX to hold the register containing the function's return address. This
777 RTX can then be used to implement the @code{__builtin_return_address}
778 function, for level 0.
779
780 Note---earlier implementations of GCC used a single data area to hold
781 all of the per-function information. Thus when processing of a nested
782 function began the old per-function data had to be pushed onto a
783 stack, and when the processing was finished, it had to be popped off the
784 stack. GCC used to provide function pointers called
785 @code{save_machine_status} and @code{restore_machine_status} to handle
786 the saving and restoring of the target specific information. Since the
787 single data area approach is no longer used, these pointers are no
788 longer supported.
789
790 @defmac INIT_EXPANDERS
791 Macro called to initialize any target specific information. This macro
792 is called once per function, before generation of any RTL has begun.
793 The intention of this macro is to allow the initialization of the
794 function pointer @code{init_machine_status}.
795 @end defmac
796
797 @deftypevar {void (*)(struct function *)} init_machine_status
798 If this function pointer is non-@code{NULL} it will be called once per
799 function, before function compilation starts, in order to allow the
800 target to perform any target specific initialization of the
801 @code{struct function} structure. It is intended that this would be
802 used to initialize the @code{machine} of that structure.
803
804 @code{struct machine_function} structures are expected to be freed by GC@.
805 Generally, any memory that they reference must be allocated by using
806 GC allocation, including the structure itself.
807 @end deftypevar
808
809 @node Storage Layout
810 @section Storage Layout
811 @cindex storage layout
812
813 Note that the definitions of the macros in this table which are sizes or
814 alignments measured in bits do not need to be constant. They can be C
815 expressions that refer to static variables, such as the @code{target_flags}.
816 @xref{Run-time Target}.
817
818 @defmac BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
819 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant bit in a
820 byte has the lowest number; otherwise define it to have the value zero.
821 This means that bit-field instructions count from the most significant
822 bit. If the machine has no bit-field instructions, then this must still
823 be defined, but it doesn't matter which value it is defined to. This
824 macro need not be a constant.
825
826 This macro does not affect the way structure fields are packed into
827 bytes or words; that is controlled by @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN}.
828 @end defmac
829
830 @defmac BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
831 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant byte in a
832 word has the lowest number. This macro need not be a constant.
833 @end defmac
834
835 @defmac WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
836 Define this macro to have the value 1 if, in a multiword object, the
837 most significant word has the lowest number. This applies to both
838 memory locations and registers; see @code{REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} if the
839 order of words in memory is not the same as the order in registers. This
840 macro need not be a constant.
841 @end defmac
842
843 @defmac REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
844 On some machines, the order of words in a multiword object differs between
845 registers in memory. In such a situation, define this macro to describe
846 the order of words in a register. The macro @code{WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} controls
847 the order of words in memory.
848 @end defmac
849
850 @defmac FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
851 Define this macro to have the value 1 if @code{DFmode}, @code{XFmode} or
852 @code{TFmode} floating point numbers are stored in memory with the word
853 containing the sign bit at the lowest address; otherwise define it to
854 have the value 0. This macro need not be a constant.
855
856 You need not define this macro if the ordering is the same as for
857 multi-word integers.
858 @end defmac
859
860 @defmac BITS_PER_WORD
861 Number of bits in a word. If you do not define this macro, the default
862 is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * UNITS_PER_WORD}.
863 @end defmac
864
865 @defmac MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
866 Maximum number of bits in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
867 @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
868 largest value that @code{BITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
869 @end defmac
870
871 @defmac UNITS_PER_WORD
872 Number of storage units in a word; normally the size of a general-purpose
873 register, a power of two from 1 or 8.
874 @end defmac
875
876 @defmac MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
877 Minimum number of units in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
878 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
879 smallest value that @code{UNITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
880 @end defmac
881
882 @defmac POINTER_SIZE
883 Width of a pointer, in bits. You must specify a value no wider than the
884 width of @code{Pmode}. If it is not equal to the width of @code{Pmode},
885 you must define @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED}. If you do not specify
886 a value the default is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
887 @end defmac
888
889 @defmac POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
890 A C expression that determines how pointers should be extended from
891 @code{ptr_mode} to either @code{Pmode} or @code{word_mode}. It is
892 greater than zero if pointers should be zero-extended, zero if they
893 should be sign-extended, and negative if some other sort of conversion
894 is needed. In the last case, the extension is done by the target's
895 @code{ptr_extend} instruction.
896
897 You need not define this macro if the @code{ptr_mode}, @code{Pmode}
898 and @code{word_mode} are all the same width.
899 @end defmac
900
901 @defmac PROMOTE_MODE (@var{m}, @var{unsignedp}, @var{type})
902 A macro to update @var{m} and @var{unsignedp} when an object whose type
903 is @var{type} and which has the specified mode and signedness is to be
904 stored in a register. This macro is only called when @var{type} is a
905 scalar type.
906
907 On most RISC machines, which only have operations that operate on a full
908 register, define this macro to set @var{m} to @code{word_mode} if
909 @var{m} is an integer mode narrower than @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. In most
910 cases, only integer modes should be widened because wider-precision
911 floating-point operations are usually more expensive than their narrower
912 counterparts.
913
914 For most machines, the macro definition does not change @var{unsignedp}.
915 However, some machines, have instructions that preferentially handle
916 either signed or unsigned quantities of certain modes. For example, on
917 the DEC Alpha, 32-bit loads from memory and 32-bit add instructions
918 sign-extend the result to 64 bits. On such machines, set
919 @var{unsignedp} according to which kind of extension is more efficient.
920
921 Do not define this macro if it would never modify @var{m}.
922 @end defmac
923
924 @hook TARGET_PROMOTE_FUNCTION_MODE
925
926 @defmac PARM_BOUNDARY
927 Normal alignment required for function parameters on the stack, in
928 bits. All stack parameters receive at least this much alignment
929 regardless of data type. On most machines, this is the same as the
930 size of an integer.
931 @end defmac
932
933 @defmac STACK_BOUNDARY
934 Define this macro to the minimum alignment enforced by hardware for the
935 stack pointer on this machine. The definition is a C expression for the
936 desired alignment (measured in bits). This value is used as a default
937 if @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY} is not defined. On most machines,
938 this should be the same as @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}.
939 @end defmac
940
941 @defmac PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY
942 Define this macro if you wish to preserve a certain alignment for the
943 stack pointer, greater than what the hardware enforces. The definition
944 is a C expression for the desired alignment (measured in bits). This
945 macro must evaluate to a value equal to or larger than
946 @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
947 @end defmac
948
949 @defmac INCOMING_STACK_BOUNDARY
950 Define this macro if the incoming stack boundary may be different
951 from @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}. This macro must evaluate
952 to a value equal to or larger than @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
953 @end defmac
954
955 @defmac FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
956 Alignment required for a function entry point, in bits.
957 @end defmac
958
959 @defmac BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
960 Biggest alignment that any data type can require on this machine, in
961 bits. Note that this is not the biggest alignment that is supported,
962 just the biggest alignment that, when violated, may cause a fault.
963 @end defmac
964
965 @hook TARGET_ABSOLUTE_BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
966
967 @defmac MALLOC_ABI_ALIGNMENT
968 Alignment, in bits, a C conformant malloc implementation has to
969 provide. If not defined, the default value is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
970 @end defmac
971
972 @defmac ATTRIBUTE_ALIGNED_VALUE
973 Alignment used by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned))} construct. If
974 not defined, the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
975 @end defmac
976
977 @defmac MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
978 If defined, the smallest alignment, in bits, that can be given to an
979 object that can be referenced in one operation, without disturbing any
980 nearby object. Normally, this is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}, but may be larger
981 on machines that don't have byte or half-word store operations.
982 @end defmac
983
984 @defmac BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
985 Biggest alignment that any structure or union field can require on this
986 machine, in bits. If defined, this overrides @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} for
987 structure and union fields only, unless the field alignment has been set
988 by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct.
989 @end defmac
990
991 @defmac ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN (@var{field}, @var{computed})
992 An expression for the alignment of a structure field @var{field} if the
993 alignment computed in the usual way (including applying of
994 @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} and @code{BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT} to the
995 alignment) is @var{computed}. It overrides alignment only if the
996 field alignment has not been set by the
997 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct.
998 @end defmac
999
1000 @defmac MAX_STACK_ALIGNMENT
1001 Biggest stack alignment guaranteed by the backend. Use this macro
1002 to specify the maximum alignment of a variable on stack.
1003
1004 If not defined, the default value is @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
1005
1006 @c FIXME: The default should be @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}.
1007 @c But the fix for PR 32893 indicates that we can only guarantee
1008 @c maximum stack alignment on stack up to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, not
1009 @c @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}, if stack alignment isn't supported.
1010 @end defmac
1011
1012 @defmac MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
1013 Biggest alignment supported by the object file format of this machine.
1014 Use this macro to limit the alignment which can be specified using the
1015 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct. If not defined,
1016 the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1017
1018 On systems that use ELF, the default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is
1019 the largest supported 32-bit ELF section alignment representable on
1020 a 32-bit host e.g. @samp{(((uint64_t) 1 << 28) * 8)}.
1021 On 32-bit ELF the largest supported section alignment in bits is
1022 @samp{(0x80000000 * 8)}, but this is not representable on 32-bit hosts.
1023 @end defmac
1024
1025 @defmac DATA_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1026 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1027 the static store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1028 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
1029 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1030
1031 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1032
1033 @findex strcpy
1034 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1035 make it all fit in fewer cache lines. Another is to cause character
1036 arrays to be word-aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
1037 constants to character arrays can be done inline.
1038 @end defmac
1039
1040 @defmac DATA_ABI_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1041 Similar to @code{DATA_ALIGNMENT}, but for the cases where the ABI mandates
1042 some alignment increase, instead of optimization only purposes. E.g.@
1043 AMD x86-64 psABI says that variables with array type larger than 15 bytes
1044 must be aligned to 16 byte boundaries.
1045
1046 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1047 @end defmac
1048
1049 @defmac CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT (@var{constant}, @var{basic-align})
1050 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment given to a constant
1051 that is being placed in memory. @var{constant} is the constant and
1052 @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the object would ordinarily
1053 have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
1054 align the object.
1055
1056 The default definition just returns @var{basic-align}.
1057
1058 The typical use of this macro is to increase alignment for string
1059 constants to be word aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
1060 constants can be done inline.
1061 @end defmac
1062
1063 @defmac LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1064 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1065 the local store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1066 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
1067 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1068
1069 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1070
1071 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1072 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1073
1074 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1075 @end defmac
1076
1077 @hook TARGET_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT
1078
1079 @defmac STACK_SLOT_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{mode}, @var{basic-align})
1080 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for stack slot.
1081 @var{type} is the data type, @var{mode} is the widest mode available,
1082 and @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the slot would ordinarily
1083 have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
1084 align the slot.
1085
1086 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used when
1087 @var{type} is @code{NULL}. Otherwise, @code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT} will
1088 be used.
1089
1090 This macro is to set alignment of stack slot to the maximum alignment
1091 of all possible modes which the slot may have.
1092
1093 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1094 @end defmac
1095
1096 @defmac LOCAL_DECL_ALIGNMENT (@var{decl})
1097 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a local
1098 variable @var{decl}.
1099
1100 If this macro is not defined, then
1101 @code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (TREE_TYPE (@var{decl}), DECL_ALIGN (@var{decl}))}
1102 is used.
1103
1104 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1105 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1106
1107 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1108 @end defmac
1109
1110 @defmac MINIMUM_ALIGNMENT (@var{exp}, @var{mode}, @var{align})
1111 If defined, a C expression to compute the minimum required alignment
1112 for dynamic stack realignment purposes for @var{exp} (a type or decl),
1113 @var{mode}, assuming normal alignment @var{align}.
1114
1115 If this macro is not defined, then @var{align} will be used.
1116 @end defmac
1117
1118 @defmac EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
1119 Alignment in bits to be given to a structure bit-field that follows an
1120 empty field such as @code{int : 0;}.
1121
1122 If @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} is true, it overrides this macro.
1123 @end defmac
1124
1125 @defmac STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
1126 Number of bits which any structure or union's size must be a multiple of.
1127 Each structure or union's size is rounded up to a multiple of this.
1128
1129 If you do not define this macro, the default is the same as
1130 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1131 @end defmac
1132
1133 @defmac STRICT_ALIGNMENT
1134 Define this macro to be the value 1 if instructions will fail to work
1135 if given data not on the nominal alignment. If instructions will merely
1136 go slower in that case, define this macro as 0.
1137 @end defmac
1138
1139 @defmac PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
1140 Define this if you wish to imitate the way many other C compilers handle
1141 alignment of bit-fields and the structures that contain them.
1142
1143 The behavior is that the type written for a named bit-field (@code{int},
1144 @code{short}, or other integer type) imposes an alignment for the entire
1145 structure, as if the structure really did contain an ordinary field of
1146 that type. In addition, the bit-field is placed within the structure so
1147 that it would fit within such a field, not crossing a boundary for it.
1148
1149 Thus, on most machines, a named bit-field whose type is written as
1150 @code{int} would not cross a four-byte boundary, and would force
1151 four-byte alignment for the whole structure. (The alignment used may
1152 not be four bytes; it is controlled by the other alignment parameters.)
1153
1154 An unnamed bit-field will not affect the alignment of the containing
1155 structure.
1156
1157 If the macro is defined, its definition should be a C expression;
1158 a nonzero value for the expression enables this behavior.
1159
1160 Note that if this macro is not defined, or its value is zero, some
1161 bit-fields may cross more than one alignment boundary. The compiler can
1162 support such references if there are @samp{insv}, @samp{extv}, and
1163 @samp{extzv} insns that can directly reference memory.
1164
1165 The other known way of making bit-fields work is to define
1166 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} as large as @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1167 Then every structure can be accessed with fullwords.
1168
1169 Unless the machine has bit-field instructions or you define
1170 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} that way, you must define
1171 @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} to have a nonzero value.
1172
1173 If your aim is to make GCC use the same conventions for laying out
1174 bit-fields as are used by another compiler, here is how to investigate
1175 what the other compiler does. Compile and run this program:
1176
1177 @smallexample
1178 struct foo1
1179 @{
1180 char x;
1181 char :0;
1182 char y;
1183 @};
1184
1185 struct foo2
1186 @{
1187 char x;
1188 int :0;
1189 char y;
1190 @};
1191
1192 main ()
1193 @{
1194 printf ("Size of foo1 is %d\n",
1195 sizeof (struct foo1));
1196 printf ("Size of foo2 is %d\n",
1197 sizeof (struct foo2));
1198 exit (0);
1199 @}
1200 @end smallexample
1201
1202 If this prints 2 and 5, then the compiler's behavior is what you would
1203 get from @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS}.
1204 @end defmac
1205
1206 @defmac BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
1207 Like @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} except that its effect is limited
1208 to aligning a bit-field within the structure.
1209 @end defmac
1210
1211 @hook TARGET_ALIGN_ANON_BITFIELD
1212
1213 @hook TARGET_NARROW_VOLATILE_BITFIELD
1214
1215 @hook TARGET_MEMBER_TYPE_FORCES_BLK
1216
1217 @defmac ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN (@var{type}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
1218 Define this macro as an expression for the alignment of a type (given
1219 by @var{type} as a tree node) if the alignment computed in the usual
1220 way is @var{computed} and the alignment explicitly specified was
1221 @var{specified}.
1222
1223 The default is to use @var{specified} if it is larger; otherwise, use
1224 the smaller of @var{computed} and @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
1225 @end defmac
1226
1227 @defmac MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
1228 An integer expression for the size in bits of the largest integer
1229 machine mode that should actually be used. All integer machine modes of
1230 this size or smaller can be used for structures and unions with the
1231 appropriate sizes. If this macro is undefined, @code{GET_MODE_BITSIZE
1232 (DImode)} is assumed.
1233 @end defmac
1234
1235 @defmac STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE (@var{save_level})
1236 If defined, an expression of type @code{machine_mode} that
1237 specifies the mode of the save area operand of a
1238 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1239 @var{save_level} is one of @code{SAVE_BLOCK}, @code{SAVE_FUNCTION}, or
1240 @code{SAVE_NONLOCAL} and selects which of the three named patterns is
1241 having its mode specified.
1242
1243 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{Pmode}. You
1244 would most commonly define this macro if the
1245 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} patterns need to support both a 32- and a
1246 64-bit mode.
1247 @end defmac
1248
1249 @defmac STACK_SIZE_MODE
1250 If defined, an expression of type @code{machine_mode} that
1251 specifies the mode of the size increment operand of an
1252 @code{allocate_stack} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1253
1254 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{word_mode}.
1255 You would most commonly define this macro if the @code{allocate_stack}
1256 pattern needs to support both a 32- and a 64-bit mode.
1257 @end defmac
1258
1259 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_CMP_RETURN_MODE
1260
1261 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_SHIFT_COUNT_MODE
1262
1263 @hook TARGET_UNWIND_WORD_MODE
1264
1265 @hook TARGET_MS_BITFIELD_LAYOUT_P
1266
1267 @hook TARGET_DECIMAL_FLOAT_SUPPORTED_P
1268
1269 @hook TARGET_FIXED_POINT_SUPPORTED_P
1270
1271 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_TO_RTL_HOOK
1272
1273 @hook TARGET_INSTANTIATE_DECLS
1274
1275 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_TYPE
1276
1277 @node Type Layout
1278 @section Layout of Source Language Data Types
1279
1280 These macros define the sizes and other characteristics of the standard
1281 basic data types used in programs being compiled. Unlike the macros in
1282 the previous section, these apply to specific features of C and related
1283 languages, rather than to fundamental aspects of storage layout.
1284
1285 @defmac INT_TYPE_SIZE
1286 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the
1287 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1288 @end defmac
1289
1290 @defmac SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1291 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short} on the
1292 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is half a word.
1293 (If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up to one
1294 unit.)
1295 @end defmac
1296
1297 @defmac LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1298 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1299 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1300 @end defmac
1301
1302 @defmac ADA_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1303 On some machines, the size used for the Ada equivalent of the type
1304 @code{long} by a native Ada compiler differs from that used by C@. In
1305 that situation, define this macro to be a C expression to be used for
1306 the size of that type. If you don't define this, the default is the
1307 value of @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE}.
1308 @end defmac
1309
1310 @defmac LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1311 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long} on the
1312 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1313 words. If you want to support GNU Ada on your machine, the value of this
1314 macro must be at least 64.
1315 @end defmac
1316
1317 @defmac CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1318 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1319 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1320 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1321 @end defmac
1322
1323 @defmac BOOL_TYPE_SIZE
1324 A C expression for the size in bits of the C++ type @code{bool} and
1325 C99 type @code{_Bool} on the target machine. If you don't define
1326 this, and you probably shouldn't, the default is @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE}.
1327 @end defmac
1328
1329 @defmac FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1330 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{float} on the
1331 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1332 @end defmac
1333
1334 @defmac DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1335 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{double} on the
1336 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1337 words.
1338 @end defmac
1339
1340 @defmac LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1341 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long double} on
1342 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1343 words.
1344 @end defmac
1345
1346 @defmac SHORT_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1347 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Fract} on
1348 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1349 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1350 @end defmac
1351
1352 @defmac FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1353 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Fract} on
1354 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1355 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1356 @end defmac
1357
1358 @defmac LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1359 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Fract} on
1360 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1361 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1362 @end defmac
1363
1364 @defmac LONG_LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1365 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Fract} on
1366 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1367 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1368 @end defmac
1369
1370 @defmac SHORT_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1371 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Accum} on
1372 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1373 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1374 @end defmac
1375
1376 @defmac ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1377 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Accum} on
1378 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1379 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1380 @end defmac
1381
1382 @defmac LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1383 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Accum} on
1384 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1385 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1386 @end defmac
1387
1388 @defmac LONG_LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1389 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Accum} on
1390 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1391 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 16}.
1392 @end defmac
1393
1394 @defmac LIBGCC2_GNU_PREFIX
1395 This macro corresponds to the @code{TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX} target
1396 hook and should be defined if that hook is overriden to be true. It
1397 causes function names in libgcc to be changed to use a @code{__gnu_}
1398 prefix for their name rather than the default @code{__}. A port which
1399 uses this macro should also arrange to use @file{t-gnu-prefix} in
1400 the libgcc @file{config.host}.
1401 @end defmac
1402
1403 @defmac TARGET_FLT_EVAL_METHOD
1404 A C expression for the value for @code{FLT_EVAL_METHOD} in @file{float.h},
1405 assuming, if applicable, that the floating-point control word is in its
1406 default state. If you do not define this macro the value of
1407 @code{FLT_EVAL_METHOD} will be zero.
1408 @end defmac
1409
1410 @defmac WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1411 A C expression for the size in bits of the widest floating-point format
1412 supported by the hardware. If you define this macro, you must specify a
1413 value less than or equal to the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}.
1414 If you do not define this macro, the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1415 is the default.
1416 @end defmac
1417
1418 @defmac DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1419 An expression whose value is 1 or 0, according to whether the type
1420 @code{char} should be signed or unsigned by default. The user can
1421 always override this default with the options @option{-fsigned-char}
1422 and @option{-funsigned-char}.
1423 @end defmac
1424
1425 @hook TARGET_DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1426
1427 @defmac SIZE_TYPE
1428 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1429 for size values. The typedef name @code{size_t} is defined using the
1430 contents of the string.
1431
1432 The string can contain more than one keyword. If so, separate them with
1433 spaces, and write first any length keyword, then @code{unsigned} if
1434 appropriate, and finally @code{int}. The string must exactly match one
1435 of the data type names defined in the function
1436 @code{c_common_nodes_and_builtins} in the file @file{c-family/c-common.c}.
1437 You may not omit @code{int} or change the order---that would cause the
1438 compiler to crash on startup.
1439
1440 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long unsigned
1441 int"}.
1442 @end defmac
1443
1444 @defmac SIZETYPE
1445 GCC defines internal types (@code{sizetype}, @code{ssizetype},
1446 @code{bitsizetype} and @code{sbitsizetype}) for expressions
1447 dealing with size. This macro is a C expression for a string describing
1448 the name of the data type from which the precision of @code{sizetype}
1449 is extracted.
1450
1451 The string has the same restrictions as @code{SIZE_TYPE} string.
1452
1453 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{SIZE_TYPE}.
1454 @end defmac
1455
1456 @defmac PTRDIFF_TYPE
1457 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1458 for the result of subtracting two pointers. The typedef name
1459 @code{ptrdiff_t} is defined using the contents of the string. See
1460 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1461
1462 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long int"}.
1463 @end defmac
1464
1465 @defmac WCHAR_TYPE
1466 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1467 for wide characters. The typedef name @code{wchar_t} is defined using
1468 the contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1469 information.
1470
1471 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"int"}.
1472 @end defmac
1473
1474 @defmac WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1475 A C expression for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1476 characters. This is used in @code{cpp}, which cannot make use of
1477 @code{WCHAR_TYPE}.
1478 @end defmac
1479
1480 @defmac WINT_TYPE
1481 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to
1482 use for wide characters passed to @code{printf} and returned from
1483 @code{getwc}. The typedef name @code{wint_t} is defined using the
1484 contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1485 information.
1486
1487 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"unsigned int"}.
1488 @end defmac
1489
1490 @defmac INTMAX_TYPE
1491 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1492 can represent any value of any standard or extended signed integer type.
1493 The typedef name @code{intmax_t} is defined using the contents of the
1494 string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1495
1496 If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1497 @code{"int"}, @code{"long int"}, or @code{"long long int"} that has as
1498 much precision as @code{long long int}.
1499 @end defmac
1500
1501 @defmac UINTMAX_TYPE
1502 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1503 can represent any value of any standard or extended unsigned integer
1504 type. The typedef name @code{uintmax_t} is defined using the contents
1505 of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1506
1507 If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1508 @code{"unsigned int"}, @code{"long unsigned int"}, or @code{"long long
1509 unsigned int"} that has as much precision as @code{long long unsigned
1510 int}.
1511 @end defmac
1512
1513 @defmac SIG_ATOMIC_TYPE
1514 @defmacx INT8_TYPE
1515 @defmacx INT16_TYPE
1516 @defmacx INT32_TYPE
1517 @defmacx INT64_TYPE
1518 @defmacx UINT8_TYPE
1519 @defmacx UINT16_TYPE
1520 @defmacx UINT32_TYPE
1521 @defmacx UINT64_TYPE
1522 @defmacx INT_LEAST8_TYPE
1523 @defmacx INT_LEAST16_TYPE
1524 @defmacx INT_LEAST32_TYPE
1525 @defmacx INT_LEAST64_TYPE
1526 @defmacx UINT_LEAST8_TYPE
1527 @defmacx UINT_LEAST16_TYPE
1528 @defmacx UINT_LEAST32_TYPE
1529 @defmacx UINT_LEAST64_TYPE
1530 @defmacx INT_FAST8_TYPE
1531 @defmacx INT_FAST16_TYPE
1532 @defmacx INT_FAST32_TYPE
1533 @defmacx INT_FAST64_TYPE
1534 @defmacx UINT_FAST8_TYPE
1535 @defmacx UINT_FAST16_TYPE
1536 @defmacx UINT_FAST32_TYPE
1537 @defmacx UINT_FAST64_TYPE
1538 @defmacx INTPTR_TYPE
1539 @defmacx UINTPTR_TYPE
1540 C expressions for the standard types @code{sig_atomic_t},
1541 @code{int8_t}, @code{int16_t}, @code{int32_t}, @code{int64_t},
1542 @code{uint8_t}, @code{uint16_t}, @code{uint32_t}, @code{uint64_t},
1543 @code{int_least8_t}, @code{int_least16_t}, @code{int_least32_t},
1544 @code{int_least64_t}, @code{uint_least8_t}, @code{uint_least16_t},
1545 @code{uint_least32_t}, @code{uint_least64_t}, @code{int_fast8_t},
1546 @code{int_fast16_t}, @code{int_fast32_t}, @code{int_fast64_t},
1547 @code{uint_fast8_t}, @code{uint_fast16_t}, @code{uint_fast32_t},
1548 @code{uint_fast64_t}, @code{intptr_t}, and @code{uintptr_t}. See
1549 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1550
1551 If any of these macros evaluates to a null pointer, the corresponding
1552 type is not supported; if GCC is configured to provide
1553 @code{<stdint.h>} in such a case, the header provided may not conform
1554 to C99, depending on the type in question. The defaults for all of
1555 these macros are null pointers.
1556 @end defmac
1557
1558 @defmac TARGET_PTRMEMFUNC_VBIT_LOCATION
1559 The C++ compiler represents a pointer-to-member-function with a struct
1560 that looks like:
1561
1562 @smallexample
1563 struct @{
1564 union @{
1565 void (*fn)();
1566 ptrdiff_t vtable_index;
1567 @};
1568 ptrdiff_t delta;
1569 @};
1570 @end smallexample
1571
1572 @noindent
1573 The C++ compiler must use one bit to indicate whether the function that
1574 will be called through a pointer-to-member-function is virtual.
1575 Normally, we assume that the low-order bit of a function pointer must
1576 always be zero. Then, by ensuring that the vtable_index is odd, we can
1577 distinguish which variant of the union is in use. But, on some
1578 platforms function pointers can be odd, and so this doesn't work. In
1579 that case, we use the low-order bit of the @code{delta} field, and shift
1580 the remainder of the @code{delta} field to the left.
1581
1582 GCC will automatically make the right selection about where to store
1583 this bit using the @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY} setting for your platform.
1584 However, some platforms such as ARM/Thumb have @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}
1585 set such that functions always start at even addresses, but the lowest
1586 bit of pointers to functions indicate whether the function at that
1587 address is in ARM or Thumb mode. If this is the case of your
1588 architecture, you should define this macro to
1589 @code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_delta}.
1590
1591 In general, you should not have to define this macro. On architectures
1592 in which function addresses are always even, according to
1593 @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}, GCC will automatically define this macro to
1594 @code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_pfn}.
1595 @end defmac
1596
1597 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS
1598 Normally, the C++ compiler uses function pointers in vtables. This
1599 macro allows the target to change to use ``function descriptors''
1600 instead. Function descriptors are found on targets for whom a
1601 function pointer is actually a small data structure. Normally the
1602 data structure consists of the actual code address plus a data
1603 pointer to which the function's data is relative.
1604
1605 If vtables are used, the value of this macro should be the number
1606 of words that the function descriptor occupies.
1607 @end defmac
1608
1609 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN
1610 By default, the vtable entries are void pointers, the so the alignment
1611 is the same as pointer alignment. The value of this macro specifies
1612 the alignment of the vtable entry in bits. It should be defined only
1613 when special alignment is necessary. */
1614 @end defmac
1615
1616 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_DATA_ENTRY_DISTANCE
1617 There are a few non-descriptor entries in the vtable at offsets below
1618 zero. If these entries must be padded (say, to preserve the alignment
1619 specified by @code{TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN}), set this to the number
1620 of words in each data entry.
1621 @end defmac
1622
1623 @node Registers
1624 @section Register Usage
1625 @cindex register usage
1626
1627 This section explains how to describe what registers the target machine
1628 has, and how (in general) they can be used.
1629
1630 The description of which registers a specific instruction can use is
1631 done with register classes; see @ref{Register Classes}. For information
1632 on using registers to access a stack frame, see @ref{Frame Registers}.
1633 For passing values in registers, see @ref{Register Arguments}.
1634 For returning values in registers, see @ref{Scalar Return}.
1635
1636 @menu
1637 * Register Basics:: Number and kinds of registers.
1638 * Allocation Order:: Order in which registers are allocated.
1639 * Values in Registers:: What kinds of values each reg can hold.
1640 * Leaf Functions:: Renumbering registers for leaf functions.
1641 * Stack Registers:: Handling a register stack such as 80387.
1642 @end menu
1643
1644 @node Register Basics
1645 @subsection Basic Characteristics of Registers
1646
1647 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1648 Registers have various characteristics.
1649
1650 @defmac FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1651 Number of hardware registers known to the compiler. They receive
1652 numbers 0 through @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER-1}; thus, the first
1653 pseudo register's number really is assigned the number
1654 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
1655 @end defmac
1656
1657 @defmac FIXED_REGISTERS
1658 @cindex fixed register
1659 An initializer that says which registers are used for fixed purposes
1660 all throughout the compiled code and are therefore not available for
1661 general allocation. These would include the stack pointer, the frame
1662 pointer (except on machines where that can be used as a general
1663 register when no frame pointer is needed), the program counter on
1664 machines where that is considered one of the addressable registers,
1665 and any other numbered register with a standard use.
1666
1667 This information is expressed as a sequence of numbers, separated by
1668 commas and surrounded by braces. The @var{n}th number is 1 if
1669 register @var{n} is fixed, 0 otherwise.
1670
1671 The table initialized from this macro, and the table initialized by
1672 the following one, may be overridden at run time either automatically,
1673 by the actions of the macro @code{CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}, or by
1674 the user with the command options @option{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1675 @option{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @option{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}}.
1676 @end defmac
1677
1678 @defmac CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1679 @cindex call-used register
1680 @cindex call-clobbered register
1681 @cindex call-saved register
1682 Like @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} but has 1 for each register that is
1683 clobbered (in general) by function calls as well as for fixed
1684 registers. This macro therefore identifies the registers that are not
1685 available for general allocation of values that must live across
1686 function calls.
1687
1688 If a register has 0 in @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}, the compiler
1689 automatically saves it on function entry and restores it on function
1690 exit, if the register is used within the function.
1691 @end defmac
1692
1693 @defmac CALL_REALLY_USED_REGISTERS
1694 @cindex call-used register
1695 @cindex call-clobbered register
1696 @cindex call-saved register
1697 Like @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} except this macro doesn't require
1698 that the entire set of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} be included.
1699 (@code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} must be a superset of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}).
1700 This macro is optional. If not specified, it defaults to the value
1701 of @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}.
1702 @end defmac
1703
1704 @defmac HARD_REGNO_CALL_PART_CLOBBERED (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1705 @cindex call-used register
1706 @cindex call-clobbered register
1707 @cindex call-saved register
1708 A C expression that is nonzero if it is not permissible to store a
1709 value of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} across a
1710 call without some part of it being clobbered. For most machines this
1711 macro need not be defined. It is only required for machines that do not
1712 preserve the entire contents of a register across a call.
1713 @end defmac
1714
1715 @findex fixed_regs
1716 @findex call_used_regs
1717 @findex global_regs
1718 @findex reg_names
1719 @findex reg_class_contents
1720 @hook TARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1721
1722 @defmac INCOMING_REGNO (@var{out})
1723 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1724 expression returns the register number as seen by the called function
1725 corresponding to the register number @var{out} as seen by the calling
1726 function. Return @var{out} if register number @var{out} is not an
1727 outbound register.
1728 @end defmac
1729
1730 @defmac OUTGOING_REGNO (@var{in})
1731 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1732 expression returns the register number as seen by the calling function
1733 corresponding to the register number @var{in} as seen by the called
1734 function. Return @var{in} if register number @var{in} is not an inbound
1735 register.
1736 @end defmac
1737
1738 @defmac LOCAL_REGNO (@var{regno})
1739 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1740 expression returns true if the register is call-saved but is in the
1741 register window. Unlike most call-saved registers, such registers
1742 need not be explicitly restored on function exit or during non-local
1743 gotos.
1744 @end defmac
1745
1746 @defmac PC_REGNUM
1747 If the program counter has a register number, define this as that
1748 register number. Otherwise, do not define it.
1749 @end defmac
1750
1751 @node Allocation Order
1752 @subsection Order of Allocation of Registers
1753 @cindex order of register allocation
1754 @cindex register allocation order
1755
1756 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1757 Registers are allocated in order.
1758
1759 @defmac REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1760 If defined, an initializer for a vector of integers, containing the
1761 numbers of hard registers in the order in which GCC should prefer
1762 to use them (from most preferred to least).
1763
1764 If this macro is not defined, registers are used lowest numbered first
1765 (all else being equal).
1766
1767 One use of this macro is on machines where the highest numbered
1768 registers must always be saved and the save-multiple-registers
1769 instruction supports only sequences of consecutive registers. On such
1770 machines, define @code{REG_ALLOC_ORDER} to be an initializer that lists
1771 the highest numbered allocable register first.
1772 @end defmac
1773
1774 @defmac ADJUST_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1775 A C statement (sans semicolon) to choose the order in which to allocate
1776 hard registers for pseudo-registers local to a basic block.
1777
1778 Store the desired register order in the array @code{reg_alloc_order}.
1779 Element 0 should be the register to allocate first; element 1, the next
1780 register; and so on.
1781
1782 The macro body should not assume anything about the contents of
1783 @code{reg_alloc_order} before execution of the macro.
1784
1785 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1786 @end defmac
1787
1788 @defmac HONOR_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1789 Normally, IRA tries to estimate the costs for saving a register in the
1790 prologue and restoring it in the epilogue. This discourages it from
1791 using call-saved registers. If a machine wants to ensure that IRA
1792 allocates registers in the order given by REG_ALLOC_ORDER even if some
1793 call-saved registers appear earlier than call-used ones, then define this
1794 macro as a C expression to nonzero. Default is 0.
1795 @end defmac
1796
1797 @defmac IRA_HARD_REGNO_ADD_COST_MULTIPLIER (@var{regno})
1798 In some case register allocation order is not enough for the
1799 Integrated Register Allocator (@acronym{IRA}) to generate a good code.
1800 If this macro is defined, it should return a floating point value
1801 based on @var{regno}. The cost of using @var{regno} for a pseudo will
1802 be increased by approximately the pseudo's usage frequency times the
1803 value returned by this macro. Not defining this macro is equivalent
1804 to having it always return @code{0.0}.
1805
1806 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1807 @end defmac
1808
1809 @node Values in Registers
1810 @subsection How Values Fit in Registers
1811
1812 This section discusses the macros that describe which kinds of values
1813 (specifically, which machine modes) each register can hold, and how many
1814 consecutive registers are needed for a given mode.
1815
1816 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1817 A C expression for the number of consecutive hard registers, starting
1818 at register number @var{regno}, required to hold a value of mode
1819 @var{mode}. This macro must never return zero, even if a register
1820 cannot hold the requested mode - indicate that with HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK
1821 and/or CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS instead.
1822
1823 On a machine where all registers are exactly one word, a suitable
1824 definition of this macro is
1825
1826 @smallexample
1827 #define HARD_REGNO_NREGS(REGNO, MODE) \
1828 ((GET_MODE_SIZE (MODE) + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) \
1829 / UNITS_PER_WORD)
1830 @end smallexample
1831 @end defmac
1832
1833 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1834 A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode @var{mode}, stored
1835 in memory, ends with padding that causes it to take up more space than
1836 in registers starting at register number @var{regno} (as determined by
1837 multiplying GCC's notion of the size of the register when containing
1838 this mode by the number of registers returned by
1839 @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS}). By default this is zero.
1840
1841 For example, if a floating-point value is stored in three 32-bit
1842 registers but takes up 128 bits in memory, then this would be
1843 nonzero.
1844
1845 This macros only needs to be defined if there are cases where
1846 @code{subreg_get_info}
1847 would otherwise wrongly determine that a @code{subreg} can be
1848 represented by an offset to the register number, when in fact such a
1849 @code{subreg} would contain some of the padding not stored in
1850 registers and so not be representable.
1851 @end defmac
1852
1853 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_WITH_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1854 For values of @var{regno} and @var{mode} for which
1855 @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING} returns nonzero, a C expression
1856 returning the greater number of registers required to hold the value
1857 including any padding. In the example above, the value would be four.
1858 @end defmac
1859
1860 @defmac REGMODE_NATURAL_SIZE (@var{mode})
1861 Define this macro if the natural size of registers that hold values
1862 of mode @var{mode} is not the word size. It is a C expression that
1863 should give the natural size in bytes for the specified mode. It is
1864 used by the register allocator to try to optimize its results. This
1865 happens for example on SPARC 64-bit where the natural size of
1866 floating-point registers is still 32-bit.
1867 @end defmac
1868
1869 @defmac HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1870 A C expression that is nonzero if it is permissible to store a value
1871 of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} (or in several
1872 registers starting with that one). For a machine where all registers
1873 are equivalent, a suitable definition is
1874
1875 @smallexample
1876 #define HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK(REGNO, MODE) 1
1877 @end smallexample
1878
1879 You need not include code to check for the numbers of fixed registers,
1880 because the allocation mechanism considers them to be always occupied.
1881
1882 @cindex register pairs
1883 On some machines, double-precision values must be kept in even/odd
1884 register pairs. You can implement that by defining this macro to reject
1885 odd register numbers for such modes.
1886
1887 The minimum requirement for a mode to be OK in a register is that the
1888 @samp{mov@var{mode}} instruction pattern support moves between the
1889 register and other hard register in the same class and that moving a
1890 value into the register and back out not alter it.
1891
1892 Since the same instruction used to move @code{word_mode} will work for
1893 all narrower integer modes, it is not necessary on any machine for
1894 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} to distinguish between these modes, provided
1895 you define patterns @samp{movhi}, etc., to take advantage of this. This
1896 is useful because of the interaction between @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}
1897 and @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P}; it is very desirable for all integer modes
1898 to be tieable.
1899
1900 Many machines have special registers for floating point arithmetic.
1901 Often people assume that floating point machine modes are allowed only
1902 in floating point registers. This is not true. Any registers that
1903 can hold integers can safely @emph{hold} a floating point machine
1904 mode, whether or not floating arithmetic can be done on it in those
1905 registers. Integer move instructions can be used to move the values.
1906
1907 On some machines, though, the converse is true: fixed-point machine
1908 modes may not go in floating registers. This is true if the floating
1909 registers normalize any value stored in them, because storing a
1910 non-floating value there would garble it. In this case,
1911 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} should reject fixed-point machine modes in
1912 floating registers. But if the floating registers do not automatically
1913 normalize, if you can store any bit pattern in one and retrieve it
1914 unchanged without a trap, then any machine mode may go in a floating
1915 register, so you can define this macro to say so.
1916
1917 The primary significance of special floating registers is rather that
1918 they are the registers acceptable in floating point arithmetic
1919 instructions. However, this is of no concern to
1920 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}. You handle it by writing the proper
1921 constraints for those instructions.
1922
1923 On some machines, the floating registers are especially slow to access,
1924 so that it is better to store a value in a stack frame than in such a
1925 register if floating point arithmetic is not being done. As long as the
1926 floating registers are not in class @code{GENERAL_REGS}, they will not
1927 be used unless some pattern's constraint asks for one.
1928 @end defmac
1929
1930 @defmac HARD_REGNO_RENAME_OK (@var{from}, @var{to})
1931 A C expression that is nonzero if it is OK to rename a hard register
1932 @var{from} to another hard register @var{to}.
1933
1934 One common use of this macro is to prevent renaming of a register to
1935 another register that is not saved by a prologue in an interrupt
1936 handler.
1937
1938 The default is always nonzero.
1939 @end defmac
1940
1941 @defmac MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})
1942 A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode
1943 @var{mode1} is accessible in mode @var{mode2} without copying.
1944
1945 If @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode1})} and
1946 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode2})} are always the same for
1947 any @var{r}, then @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})}
1948 should be nonzero. If they differ for any @var{r}, you should define
1949 this macro to return zero unless some other mechanism ensures the
1950 accessibility of the value in a narrower mode.
1951
1952 You should define this macro to return nonzero in as many cases as
1953 possible since doing so will allow GCC to perform better register
1954 allocation.
1955 @end defmac
1956
1957 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_SCRATCH_OK
1958
1959 @defmac AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
1960 Define this macro if the compiler should avoid copies to/from @code{CCmode}
1961 registers. You should only define this macro if support for copying to/from
1962 @code{CCmode} is incomplete.
1963 @end defmac
1964
1965 @node Leaf Functions
1966 @subsection Handling Leaf Functions
1967
1968 @cindex leaf functions
1969 @cindex functions, leaf
1970 On some machines, a leaf function (i.e., one which makes no calls) can run
1971 more efficiently if it does not make its own register window. Often this
1972 means it is required to receive its arguments in the registers where they
1973 are passed by the caller, instead of the registers where they would
1974 normally arrive.
1975
1976 The special treatment for leaf functions generally applies only when
1977 other conditions are met; for example, often they may use only those
1978 registers for its own variables and temporaries. We use the term ``leaf
1979 function'' to mean a function that is suitable for this special
1980 handling, so that functions with no calls are not necessarily ``leaf
1981 functions''.
1982
1983 GCC assigns register numbers before it knows whether the function is
1984 suitable for leaf function treatment. So it needs to renumber the
1985 registers in order to output a leaf function. The following macros
1986 accomplish this.
1987
1988 @defmac LEAF_REGISTERS
1989 Name of a char vector, indexed by hard register number, which
1990 contains 1 for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf
1991 function treatment.
1992
1993 If leaf function treatment involves renumbering the registers, then the
1994 registers marked here should be the ones before renumbering---those that
1995 GCC would ordinarily allocate. The registers which will actually be
1996 used in the assembler code, after renumbering, should not be marked with 1
1997 in this vector.
1998
1999 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize
2000 the treatment of leaf functions.
2001 @end defmac
2002
2003 @defmac LEAF_REG_REMAP (@var{regno})
2004 A C expression whose value is the register number to which @var{regno}
2005 should be renumbered, when a function is treated as a leaf function.
2006
2007 If @var{regno} is a register number which should not appear in a leaf
2008 function before renumbering, then the expression should yield @minus{}1, which
2009 will cause the compiler to abort.
2010
2011 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize the
2012 treatment of leaf functions, and registers need to be renumbered to do
2013 this.
2014 @end defmac
2015
2016 @findex current_function_is_leaf
2017 @findex current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs
2018 @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
2019 @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must usually treat leaf functions
2020 specially. They can test the C variable @code{current_function_is_leaf}
2021 which is nonzero for leaf functions. @code{current_function_is_leaf} is
2022 set prior to local register allocation and is valid for the remaining
2023 compiler passes. They can also test the C variable
2024 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} which is nonzero for leaf
2025 functions which only use leaf registers.
2026 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} is valid after all passes
2027 that modify the instructions have been run and is only useful if
2028 @code{LEAF_REGISTERS} is defined.
2029 @c changed this to fix overfull. ALSO: why the "it" at the beginning
2030 @c of the next paragraph?! --mew 2feb93
2031
2032 @node Stack Registers
2033 @subsection Registers That Form a Stack
2034
2035 There are special features to handle computers where some of the
2036 ``registers'' form a stack. Stack registers are normally written by
2037 pushing onto the stack, and are numbered relative to the top of the
2038 stack.
2039
2040 Currently, GCC can only handle one group of stack-like registers, and
2041 they must be consecutively numbered. Furthermore, the existing
2042 support for stack-like registers is specific to the 80387 floating
2043 point coprocessor. If you have a new architecture that uses
2044 stack-like registers, you will need to do substantial work on
2045 @file{reg-stack.c} and write your machine description to cooperate
2046 with it, as well as defining these macros.
2047
2048 @defmac STACK_REGS
2049 Define this if the machine has any stack-like registers.
2050 @end defmac
2051
2052 @defmac STACK_REG_COVER_CLASS
2053 This is a cover class containing the stack registers. Define this if
2054 the machine has any stack-like registers.
2055 @end defmac
2056
2057 @defmac FIRST_STACK_REG
2058 The number of the first stack-like register. This one is the top
2059 of the stack.
2060 @end defmac
2061
2062 @defmac LAST_STACK_REG
2063 The number of the last stack-like register. This one is the bottom of
2064 the stack.
2065 @end defmac
2066
2067 @node Register Classes
2068 @section Register Classes
2069 @cindex register class definitions
2070 @cindex class definitions, register
2071
2072 On many machines, the numbered registers are not all equivalent.
2073 For example, certain registers may not be allowed for indexed addressing;
2074 certain registers may not be allowed in some instructions. These machine
2075 restrictions are described to the compiler using @dfn{register classes}.
2076
2077 You define a number of register classes, giving each one a name and saying
2078 which of the registers belong to it. Then you can specify register classes
2079 that are allowed as operands to particular instruction patterns.
2080
2081 @findex ALL_REGS
2082 @findex NO_REGS
2083 In general, each register will belong to several classes. In fact, one
2084 class must be named @code{ALL_REGS} and contain all the registers. Another
2085 class must be named @code{NO_REGS} and contain no registers. Often the
2086 union of two classes will be another class; however, this is not required.
2087
2088 @findex GENERAL_REGS
2089 One of the classes must be named @code{GENERAL_REGS}. There is nothing
2090 terribly special about the name, but the operand constraint letters
2091 @samp{r} and @samp{g} specify this class. If @code{GENERAL_REGS} is
2092 the same as @code{ALL_REGS}, just define it as a macro which expands
2093 to @code{ALL_REGS}.
2094
2095 Order the classes so that if class @var{x} is contained in class @var{y}
2096 then @var{x} has a lower class number than @var{y}.
2097
2098 The way classes other than @code{GENERAL_REGS} are specified in operand
2099 constraints is through machine-dependent operand constraint letters.
2100 You can define such letters to correspond to various classes, then use
2101 them in operand constraints.
2102
2103 You must define the narrowest register classes for allocatable
2104 registers, so that each class either has no subclasses, or that for
2105 some mode, the move cost between registers within the class is
2106 cheaper than moving a register in the class to or from memory
2107 (@pxref{Costs}).
2108
2109 You should define a class for the union of two classes whenever some
2110 instruction allows both classes. For example, if an instruction allows
2111 either a floating point (coprocessor) register or a general register for a
2112 certain operand, you should define a class @code{FLOAT_OR_GENERAL_REGS}
2113 which includes both of them. Otherwise you will get suboptimal code,
2114 or even internal compiler errors when reload cannot find a register in the
2115 class computed via @code{reg_class_subunion}.
2116
2117 You must also specify certain redundant information about the register
2118 classes: for each class, which classes contain it and which ones are
2119 contained in it; for each pair of classes, the largest class contained
2120 in their union.
2121
2122 When a value occupying several consecutive registers is expected in a
2123 certain class, all the registers used must belong to that class.
2124 Therefore, register classes cannot be used to enforce a requirement for
2125 a register pair to start with an even-numbered register. The way to
2126 specify this requirement is with @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}.
2127
2128 Register classes used for input-operands of bitwise-and or shift
2129 instructions have a special requirement: each such class must have, for
2130 each fixed-point machine mode, a subclass whose registers can transfer that
2131 mode to or from memory. For example, on some machines, the operations for
2132 single-byte values (@code{QImode}) are limited to certain registers. When
2133 this is so, each register class that is used in a bitwise-and or shift
2134 instruction must have a subclass consisting of registers from which
2135 single-byte values can be loaded or stored. This is so that
2136 @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} can always have a possible value to return.
2137
2138 @deftp {Data type} {enum reg_class}
2139 An enumerated type that must be defined with all the register class names
2140 as enumerated values. @code{NO_REGS} must be first. @code{ALL_REGS}
2141 must be the last register class, followed by one more enumerated value,
2142 @code{LIM_REG_CLASSES}, which is not a register class but rather
2143 tells how many classes there are.
2144
2145 Each register class has a number, which is the value of casting
2146 the class name to type @code{int}. The number serves as an index
2147 in many of the tables described below.
2148 @end deftp
2149
2150 @defmac N_REG_CLASSES
2151 The number of distinct register classes, defined as follows:
2152
2153 @smallexample
2154 #define N_REG_CLASSES (int) LIM_REG_CLASSES
2155 @end smallexample
2156 @end defmac
2157
2158 @defmac REG_CLASS_NAMES
2159 An initializer containing the names of the register classes as C string
2160 constants. These names are used in writing some of the debugging dumps.
2161 @end defmac
2162
2163 @defmac REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
2164 An initializer containing the contents of the register classes, as integers
2165 which are bit masks. The @var{n}th integer specifies the contents of class
2166 @var{n}. The way the integer @var{mask} is interpreted is that
2167 register @var{r} is in the class if @code{@var{mask} & (1 << @var{r})} is 1.
2168
2169 When the machine has more than 32 registers, an integer does not suffice.
2170 Then the integers are replaced by sub-initializers, braced groupings containing
2171 several integers. Each sub-initializer must be suitable as an initializer
2172 for the type @code{HARD_REG_SET} which is defined in @file{hard-reg-set.h}.
2173 In this situation, the first integer in each sub-initializer corresponds to
2174 registers 0 through 31, the second integer to registers 32 through 63, and
2175 so on.
2176 @end defmac
2177
2178 @defmac REGNO_REG_CLASS (@var{regno})
2179 A C expression whose value is a register class containing hard register
2180 @var{regno}. In general there is more than one such class; choose a class
2181 which is @dfn{minimal}, meaning that no smaller class also contains the
2182 register.
2183 @end defmac
2184
2185 @defmac BASE_REG_CLASS
2186 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2187 base register must belong. A base register is one used in an address
2188 which is the register value plus a displacement.
2189 @end defmac
2190
2191 @defmac MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2192 This is a variation of the @code{BASE_REG_CLASS} macro which allows
2193 the selection of a base register in a mode dependent manner. If
2194 @var{mode} is VOIDmode then it should return the same value as
2195 @code{BASE_REG_CLASS}.
2196 @end defmac
2197
2198 @defmac MODE_BASE_REG_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2199 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2200 base register must belong in order to be used in a base plus index
2201 register address. You should define this macro if base plus index
2202 addresses have different requirements than other base register uses.
2203 @end defmac
2204
2205 @defmac MODE_CODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2206 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2207 base register for a memory reference in mode @var{mode} to address
2208 space @var{address_space} must belong. @var{outer_code} and @var{index_code}
2209 define the context in which the base register occurs. @var{outer_code} is
2210 the code of the immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} for the top level
2211 of an address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2212 @code{address_operand}). @var{index_code} is the code of the corresponding
2213 index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS}; @code{SCRATCH} otherwise.
2214 @end defmac
2215
2216 @defmac INDEX_REG_CLASS
2217 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2218 index register must belong. An index register is one used in an
2219 address where its value is either multiplied by a scale factor or
2220 added to another register (as well as added to a displacement).
2221 @end defmac
2222
2223 @defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num})
2224 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2225 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses.
2226 @end defmac
2227
2228 @defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2229 A C expression that is just like @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
2230 that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
2231 @var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
2232 reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
2233 you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
2234 @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}. The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for
2235 addresses that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an
2236 @code{address_operand}.
2237 @end defmac
2238
2239 @defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_REG_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2240 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is suitable for
2241 use as a base register in base plus index operand addresses, accessing
2242 memory in mode @var{mode}. It may be either a suitable hard register or a
2243 pseudo register that has been allocated such a hard register. You should
2244 define this macro if base plus index addresses have different requirements
2245 than other base register uses.
2246
2247 Use of this macro is deprecated; please use the more general
2248 @code{REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
2249 @end defmac
2250
2251 @defmac REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2252 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2253 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses, accessing
2254 memory in mode @var{mode} in address space @var{address_space}.
2255 This is similar to @code{REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except
2256 that that expression may examine the context in which the register
2257 appears in the memory reference. @var{outer_code} is the code of the
2258 immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} if at the top level of the
2259 address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2260 @code{address_operand}). @var{index_code} is the code of the
2261 corresponding index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS};
2262 @code{SCRATCH} otherwise. The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for addresses
2263 that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an @code{address_operand}.
2264 @end defmac
2265
2266 @defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{num})
2267 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2268 suitable for use as an index register in operand addresses. It may be
2269 either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
2270 allocated such a hard register.
2271
2272 The difference between an index register and a base register is that
2273 the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
2274 two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
2275 labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
2276 labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
2277 may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
2278 looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
2279 only if neither labeling works.
2280 @end defmac
2281
2282 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_RENAME_CLASS
2283
2284 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS
2285
2286 @defmac PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
2287 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2288 to use when it is necessary to copy value @var{x} into a register in class
2289 @var{class}. The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps
2290 another, smaller class. On many machines, the following definition is
2291 safe:
2292
2293 @smallexample
2294 #define PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS(X,CLASS) CLASS
2295 @end smallexample
2296
2297 Sometimes returning a more restrictive class makes better code. For
2298 example, on the 68000, when @var{x} is an integer constant that is in range
2299 for a @samp{moveq} instruction, the value of this macro is always
2300 @code{DATA_REGS} as long as @var{class} includes the data registers.
2301 Requiring a data register guarantees that a @samp{moveq} will be used.
2302
2303 One case where @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} must not return
2304 @var{class} is if @var{x} is a legitimate constant which cannot be
2305 loaded into some register class. By returning @code{NO_REGS} you can
2306 force @var{x} into a memory location. For example, rs6000 can load
2307 immediate values into general-purpose registers, but does not have an
2308 instruction for loading an immediate value into a floating-point
2309 register, so @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} returns @code{NO_REGS} when
2310 @var{x} is a floating-point constant. If the constant can't be loaded
2311 into any kind of register, code generation will be better if
2312 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P} makes the constant illegitimate instead
2313 of using @code{TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}.
2314
2315 If an insn has pseudos in it after register allocation, reload will go
2316 through the alternatives and call repeatedly @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}
2317 to find the best one. Returning @code{NO_REGS}, in this case, makes
2318 reload add a @code{!} in front of the constraint: the x86 back-end uses
2319 this feature to discourage usage of 387 registers when math is done in
2320 the SSE registers (and vice versa).
2321 @end defmac
2322
2323 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
2324
2325 @defmac LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{class})
2326 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2327 to use when it is necessary to be able to hold a value of mode
2328 @var{mode} in a reload register for which class @var{class} would
2329 ordinarily be used.
2330
2331 Unlike @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, this macro should be used when
2332 there are certain modes that simply can't go in certain reload classes.
2333
2334 The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps another,
2335 smaller class.
2336
2337 Don't define this macro unless the target machine has limitations which
2338 require the macro to do something nontrivial.
2339 @end defmac
2340
2341 @hook TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD
2342
2343 @defmac SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2344 @defmacx SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2345 @defmacx SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2346 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
2347 @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD} instead.
2348
2349 These are obsolete macros, replaced by the @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD}
2350 target hook. Older ports still define these macros to indicate to the
2351 reload phase that it may
2352 need to allocate at least one register for a reload in addition to the
2353 register to contain the data. Specifically, if copying @var{x} to a
2354 register @var{class} in @var{mode} requires an intermediate register,
2355 you were supposed to define @code{SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} to return the
2356 largest register class all of whose registers can be used as
2357 intermediate registers or scratch registers.
2358
2359 If copying a register @var{class} in @var{mode} to @var{x} requires an
2360 intermediate or scratch register, @code{SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS}
2361 was supposed to be defined be defined to return the largest register
2362 class required. If the
2363 requirements for input and output reloads were the same, the macro
2364 @code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS} should have been used instead of defining both
2365 macros identically.
2366
2367 The values returned by these macros are often @code{GENERAL_REGS}.
2368 Return @code{NO_REGS} if no spare register is needed; i.e., if @var{x}
2369 can be directly copied to or from a register of @var{class} in
2370 @var{mode} without requiring a scratch register. Do not define this
2371 macro if it would always return @code{NO_REGS}.
2372
2373 If a scratch register is required (either with or without an
2374 intermediate register), you were supposed to define patterns for
2375 @samp{reload_in@var{m}} or @samp{reload_out@var{m}}, as required
2376 (@pxref{Standard Names}. These patterns, which were normally
2377 implemented with a @code{define_expand}, should be similar to the
2378 @samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, except that operand 2 is the scratch
2379 register.
2380
2381 These patterns need constraints for the reload register and scratch
2382 register that
2383 contain a single register class. If the original reload register (whose
2384 class is @var{class}) can meet the constraint given in the pattern, the
2385 value returned by these macros is used for the class of the scratch
2386 register. Otherwise, two additional reload registers are required.
2387 Their classes are obtained from the constraints in the insn pattern.
2388
2389 @var{x} might be a pseudo-register or a @code{subreg} of a
2390 pseudo-register, which could either be in a hard register or in memory.
2391 Use @code{true_regnum} to find out; it will return @minus{}1 if the pseudo is
2392 in memory and the hard register number if it is in a register.
2393
2394 These macros should not be used in the case where a particular class of
2395 registers can only be copied to memory and not to another class of
2396 registers. In that case, secondary reload registers are not needed and
2397 would not be helpful. Instead, a stack location must be used to perform
2398 the copy and the @code{mov@var{m}} pattern should use memory as an
2399 intermediate storage. This case often occurs between floating-point and
2400 general registers.
2401 @end defmac
2402
2403 @defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED (@var{class1}, @var{class2}, @var{m})
2404 Certain machines have the property that some registers cannot be copied
2405 to some other registers without using memory. Define this macro on
2406 those machines to be a C expression that is nonzero if objects of mode
2407 @var{m} in registers of @var{class1} can only be copied to registers of
2408 class @var{class2} by storing a register of @var{class1} into memory
2409 and loading that memory location into a register of @var{class2}.
2410
2411 Do not define this macro if its value would always be zero.
2412 @end defmac
2413
2414 @defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX (@var{mode})
2415 Normally when @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} is defined, the compiler
2416 allocates a stack slot for a memory location needed for register copies.
2417 If this macro is defined, the compiler instead uses the memory location
2418 defined by this macro.
2419
2420 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2421 @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED}.
2422 @end defmac
2423
2424 @defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE (@var{mode})
2425 When the compiler needs a secondary memory location to copy between two
2426 registers of mode @var{mode}, it normally allocates sufficient memory to
2427 hold a quantity of @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits and performs the store and
2428 load operations in a mode that many bits wide and whose class is the
2429 same as that of @var{mode}.
2430
2431 This is right thing to do on most machines because it ensures that all
2432 bits of the register are copied and prevents accesses to the registers
2433 in a narrower mode, which some machines prohibit for floating-point
2434 registers.
2435
2436 However, this default behavior is not correct on some machines, such as
2437 the DEC Alpha, that store short integers in floating-point registers
2438 differently than in integer registers. On those machines, the default
2439 widening will not work correctly and you must define this macro to
2440 suppress that widening in some cases. See the file @file{alpha.h} for
2441 details.
2442
2443 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2444 @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} or if widening @var{mode} to a mode that
2445 is @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits wide is correct for your machine.
2446 @end defmac
2447
2448 @hook TARGET_CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P
2449
2450 @hook TARGET_CLASS_MAX_NREGS
2451
2452 @defmac CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})
2453 A C expression for the maximum number of consecutive registers
2454 of class @var{class} needed to hold a value of mode @var{mode}.
2455
2456 This is closely related to the macro @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS}. In fact,
2457 the value of the macro @code{CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})}
2458 should be the maximum value of @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno},
2459 @var{mode})} for all @var{regno} values in the class @var{class}.
2460
2461 This macro helps control the handling of multiple-word values
2462 in the reload pass.
2463 @end defmac
2464
2465 @defmac CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS (@var{from}, @var{to}, @var{class})
2466 If defined, a C expression that returns nonzero for a @var{class} for which
2467 a change from mode @var{from} to mode @var{to} is invalid.
2468
2469 For example, loading 32-bit integer or floating-point objects into
2470 floating-point registers on Alpha extends them to 64 bits.
2471 Therefore loading a 64-bit object and then storing it as a 32-bit object
2472 does not store the low-order 32 bits, as would be the case for a normal
2473 register. Therefore, @file{alpha.h} defines @code{CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS}
2474 as below:
2475
2476 @smallexample
2477 #define CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS(FROM, TO, CLASS) \
2478 (GET_MODE_SIZE (FROM) != GET_MODE_SIZE (TO) \
2479 ? reg_classes_intersect_p (FLOAT_REGS, (CLASS)) : 0)
2480 @end smallexample
2481
2482 Even if storing from a register in mode @var{to} would be valid,
2483 if both @var{from} and @code{raw_reg_mode} for @var{class} are wider
2484 than @code{word_mode}, then we must prevent @var{to} narrowing the
2485 mode. This happens when the middle-end assumes that it can load
2486 or store pieces of an @var{N}-word pseudo, and that the pseudo will
2487 eventually be allocated to @var{N} @code{word_mode} hard registers.
2488 Failure to prevent this kind of mode change will result in the
2489 entire @code{raw_reg_mode} being modified instead of the partial
2490 value that the middle-end intended.
2491
2492 @end defmac
2493
2494 @hook TARGET_IRA_CHANGE_PSEUDO_ALLOCNO_CLASS
2495
2496 @hook TARGET_LRA_P
2497
2498 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_PRIORITY
2499
2500 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_USAGE_LEVELING_P
2501
2502 @hook TARGET_DIFFERENT_ADDR_DISPLACEMENT_P
2503
2504 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_SUBSTITUTE_MEM_EQUIV_P
2505
2506 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS_DISPLACEMENT
2507
2508 @hook TARGET_SPILL_CLASS
2509
2510 @hook TARGET_CSTORE_MODE
2511
2512 @node Stack and Calling
2513 @section Stack Layout and Calling Conventions
2514 @cindex calling conventions
2515
2516 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2517 This describes the stack layout and calling conventions.
2518
2519 @menu
2520 * Frame Layout::
2521 * Exception Handling::
2522 * Stack Checking::
2523 * Frame Registers::
2524 * Elimination::
2525 * Stack Arguments::
2526 * Register Arguments::
2527 * Scalar Return::
2528 * Aggregate Return::
2529 * Caller Saves::
2530 * Function Entry::
2531 * Profiling::
2532 * Tail Calls::
2533 * Stack Smashing Protection::
2534 * Miscellaneous Register Hooks::
2535 @end menu
2536
2537 @node Frame Layout
2538 @subsection Basic Stack Layout
2539 @cindex stack frame layout
2540 @cindex frame layout
2541
2542 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2543 Here is the basic stack layout.
2544
2545 @defmac STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2546 Define this macro to be true if pushing a word onto the stack moves the stack
2547 pointer to a smaller address, and false otherwise.
2548 @end defmac
2549
2550 @defmac STACK_PUSH_CODE
2551 This macro defines the operation used when something is pushed
2552 on the stack. In RTL, a push operation will be
2553 @code{(set (mem (STACK_PUSH_CODE (reg sp))) @dots{})}
2554
2555 The choices are @code{PRE_DEC}, @code{POST_DEC}, @code{PRE_INC},
2556 and @code{POST_INC}. Which of these is correct depends on
2557 the stack direction and on whether the stack pointer points
2558 to the last item on the stack or whether it points to the
2559 space for the next item on the stack.
2560
2561 The default is @code{PRE_DEC} when @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is
2562 true, which is almost always right, and @code{PRE_INC} otherwise,
2563 which is often wrong.
2564 @end defmac
2565
2566 @defmac FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2567 Define this macro to nonzero value if the addresses of local variable slots
2568 are at negative offsets from the frame pointer.
2569 @end defmac
2570
2571 @defmac ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2572 Define this macro if successive arguments to a function occupy decreasing
2573 addresses on the stack.
2574 @end defmac
2575
2576 @defmac STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2577 Offset from the frame pointer to the first local variable slot to be allocated.
2578
2579 If @code{FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD}, find the next slot's offset by
2580 subtracting the first slot's length from @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2581 Otherwise, it is found by adding the length of the first slot to the
2582 value @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2583 @c i'm not sure if the above is still correct.. had to change it to get
2584 @c rid of an overfull. --mew 2feb93
2585 @end defmac
2586
2587 @defmac STACK_ALIGNMENT_NEEDED
2588 Define to zero to disable final alignment of the stack during reload.
2589 The nonzero default for this macro is suitable for most ports.
2590
2591 On ports where @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET} is nonzero or where there
2592 is a register save block following the local block that doesn't require
2593 alignment to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, it may be beneficial to disable
2594 stack alignment and do it in the backend.
2595 @end defmac
2596
2597 @defmac STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2598 Offset from the stack pointer register to the first location at which
2599 outgoing arguments are placed. If not specified, the default value of
2600 zero is used. This is the proper value for most machines.
2601
2602 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2603 the first location at which outgoing arguments are placed.
2604 @end defmac
2605
2606 @defmac FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2607 Offset from the argument pointer register to the first argument's
2608 address. On some machines it may depend on the data type of the
2609 function.
2610
2611 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2612 the first argument's address.
2613 @end defmac
2614
2615 @defmac STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2616 Offset from the stack pointer register to an item dynamically allocated
2617 on the stack, e.g., by @code{alloca}.
2618
2619 The default value for this macro is @code{STACK_POINTER_OFFSET} plus the
2620 length of the outgoing arguments. The default is correct for most
2621 machines. See @file{function.c} for details.
2622 @end defmac
2623
2624 @defmac INITIAL_FRAME_ADDRESS_RTX
2625 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address of the initial
2626 stack frame. This address is passed to @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and
2627 @code{DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS}. If you don't define this macro, a reasonable
2628 default value will be used. Define this macro in order to make frame pointer
2629 elimination work in the presence of @code{__builtin_frame_address (count)} and
2630 @code{__builtin_return_address (count)} for @code{count} not equal to zero.
2631 @end defmac
2632
2633 @defmac DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS (@var{frameaddr})
2634 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address in a stack
2635 frame where the pointer to the caller's frame is stored. Assume that
2636 @var{frameaddr} is an RTL expression for the address of the stack frame
2637 itself.
2638
2639 If you don't define this macro, the default is to return the value
2640 of @var{frameaddr}---that is, the stack frame address is also the
2641 address of the stack word that points to the previous frame.
2642 @end defmac
2643
2644 @defmac SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
2645 A C expression that produces the machine-specific code to
2646 setup the stack so that arbitrary frames can be accessed. For example,
2647 on the SPARC, we must flush all of the register windows to the stack
2648 before we can access arbitrary stack frames. You will seldom need to
2649 define this macro. The default is to do nothing.
2650 @end defmac
2651
2652 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE
2653
2654 @defmac FRAME_ADDR_RTX (@var{frameaddr})
2655 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the frame
2656 address for the current frame. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer
2657 of the current frame. This is used for __builtin_frame_address.
2658 You need only define this macro if the frame address is not the same
2659 as the frame pointer. Most machines do not need to define it.
2660 @end defmac
2661
2662 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_RTX (@var{count}, @var{frameaddr})
2663 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the return
2664 address for the frame @var{count} steps up from the current frame, after
2665 the prologue. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer of the @var{count}
2666 frame, or the frame pointer of the @var{count} @minus{} 1 frame if
2667 @code{RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME} is nonzero.
2668
2669 The value of the expression must always be the correct address when
2670 @var{count} is zero, but may be @code{NULL_RTX} if there is no way to
2671 determine the return address of other frames.
2672 @end defmac
2673
2674 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2675 Define this macro to nonzero value if the return address of a particular
2676 stack frame is accessed from the frame pointer of the previous stack
2677 frame. The zero default for this macro is suitable for most ports.
2678 @end defmac
2679
2680 @defmac INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2681 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the location of the
2682 incoming return address at the beginning of any function, before the
2683 prologue. This RTL is either a @code{REG}, indicating that the return
2684 value is saved in @samp{REG}, or a @code{MEM} representing a location in
2685 the stack.
2686
2687 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2688 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2689
2690 If this RTL is a @code{REG}, you should also define
2691 @code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (REGNO)}.
2692 @end defmac
2693
2694 @defmac DWARF_ALT_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN
2695 A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 column
2696 number that may be used as an alternative return column. The column
2697 must not correspond to any gcc hard register (that is, it must not
2698 be in the range of @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM}).
2699
2700 This macro can be useful if @code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} is set to a
2701 general register, but an alternative column needs to be used for signal
2702 frames. Some targets have also used different frame return columns
2703 over time.
2704 @end defmac
2705
2706 @defmac DWARF_ZERO_REG
2707 A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 register
2708 number that is considered to always have the value zero. This should
2709 only be defined if the target has an architected zero register, and
2710 someone decided it was a good idea to use that register number to
2711 terminate the stack backtrace. New ports should avoid this.
2712 @end defmac
2713
2714 @hook TARGET_DWARF_HANDLE_FRAME_UNSPEC
2715
2716 @defmac INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2717 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2718 from the value of the stack pointer register to the top of the stack
2719 frame at the beginning of any function, before the prologue. The top of
2720 the frame is defined to be the value of the stack pointer in the
2721 previous frame, just before the call instruction.
2722
2723 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2724 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2725 @end defmac
2726
2727 @defmac ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2728 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2729 from the argument pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa). The
2730 final value should coincide with that calculated by
2731 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}. Which is unfortunately not usable
2732 during virtual register instantiation.
2733
2734 The default value for this macro is
2735 @code{FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (fundecl) + crtl->args.pretend_args_size},
2736 which is correct for most machines; in general, the arguments are found
2737 immediately before the stack frame. Note that this is not the case on
2738 some targets that save registers into the caller's frame, such as SPARC
2739 and rs6000, and so such targets need to define this macro.
2740
2741 You only need to define this macro if the default is incorrect, and you
2742 want to support call frame debugging information like that provided by
2743 DWARF 2.
2744 @end defmac
2745
2746 @defmac FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2747 If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
2748 in bytes from the frame pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa).
2749 The final value should coincide with that calculated by
2750 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}.
2751
2752 Normally the CFA is calculated as an offset from the argument pointer,
2753 via @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}, but if the argument pointer is
2754 variable due to the ABI, this may not be possible. If this macro is
2755 defined, it implies that the virtual register instantiation should be
2756 based on the frame pointer instead of the argument pointer. Only one
2757 of @code{FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET} and @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}
2758 should be defined.
2759 @end defmac
2760
2761 @defmac CFA_FRAME_BASE_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2762 If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
2763 in bytes from the canonical frame address (cfa) to the frame base used
2764 in DWARF 2 debug information. The default is zero. A different value
2765 may reduce the size of debug information on some ports.
2766 @end defmac
2767
2768 @node Exception Handling
2769 @subsection Exception Handling Support
2770 @cindex exception handling
2771
2772 @defmac EH_RETURN_DATA_REGNO (@var{N})
2773 A C expression whose value is the @var{N}th register number used for
2774 data by exception handlers, or @code{INVALID_REGNUM} if fewer than
2775 @var{N} registers are usable.
2776
2777 The exception handling library routines communicate with the exception
2778 handlers via a set of agreed upon registers. Ideally these registers
2779 should be call-clobbered; it is possible to use call-saved registers,
2780 but may negatively impact code size. The target must support at least
2781 2 data registers, but should define 4 if there are enough free registers.
2782
2783 You must define this macro if you want to support call frame exception
2784 handling like that provided by DWARF 2.
2785 @end defmac
2786
2787 @defmac EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX
2788 A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
2789 to store a stack adjustment to be applied before function return.
2790 This is used to unwind the stack to an exception handler's call frame.
2791 It will be assigned zero on code paths that return normally.
2792
2793 Typically this is a call-clobbered hard register that is otherwise
2794 untouched by the epilogue, but could also be a stack slot.
2795
2796 Do not define this macro if the stack pointer is saved and restored
2797 by the regular prolog and epilog code in the call frame itself; in
2798 this case, the exception handling library routines will update the
2799 stack location to be restored in place. Otherwise, you must define
2800 this macro if you want to support call frame exception handling like
2801 that provided by DWARF 2.
2802 @end defmac
2803
2804 @defmac EH_RETURN_HANDLER_RTX
2805 A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
2806 to store the address of an exception handler to which we should
2807 return. It will not be assigned on code paths that return normally.
2808
2809 Typically this is the location in the call frame at which the normal
2810 return address is stored. For targets that return by popping an
2811 address off the stack, this might be a memory address just below
2812 the @emph{target} call frame rather than inside the current call
2813 frame. If defined, @code{EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX} will have already
2814 been assigned, so it may be used to calculate the location of the
2815 target call frame.
2816
2817 Some targets have more complex requirements than storing to an
2818 address calculable during initial code generation. In that case
2819 the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern should be used instead.
2820
2821 If you want to support call frame exception handling, you must
2822 define either this macro or the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern.
2823 @end defmac
2824
2825 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_OFFSET
2826 If defined, an integer-valued C expression for which rtl will be generated
2827 to add it to the exception handler address before it is searched in the
2828 exception handling tables, and to subtract it again from the address before
2829 using it to return to the exception handler.
2830 @end defmac
2831
2832 @defmac ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT (@var{code}, @var{global})
2833 This macro chooses the encoding of pointers embedded in the exception
2834 handling sections. If at all possible, this should be defined such
2835 that the exception handling section will not require dynamic relocations,
2836 and so may be read-only.
2837
2838 @var{code} is 0 for data, 1 for code labels, 2 for function pointers.
2839 @var{global} is true if the symbol may be affected by dynamic relocations.
2840 The macro should return a combination of the @code{DW_EH_PE_*} defines
2841 as found in @file{dwarf2.h}.
2842
2843 If this macro is not defined, pointers will not be encoded but
2844 represented directly.
2845 @end defmac
2846
2847 @defmac ASM_MAYBE_OUTPUT_ENCODED_ADDR_RTX (@var{file}, @var{encoding}, @var{size}, @var{addr}, @var{done})
2848 This macro allows the target to emit whatever special magic is required
2849 to represent the encoding chosen by @code{ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT}.
2850 Generic code takes care of pc-relative and indirect encodings; this must
2851 be defined if the target uses text-relative or data-relative encodings.
2852
2853 This is a C statement that branches to @var{done} if the format was
2854 handled. @var{encoding} is the format chosen, @var{size} is the number
2855 of bytes that the format occupies, @var{addr} is the @code{SYMBOL_REF}
2856 to be emitted.
2857 @end defmac
2858
2859 @defmac MD_FALLBACK_FRAME_STATE_FOR (@var{context}, @var{fs})
2860 This macro allows the target to add CPU and operating system specific
2861 code to the call-frame unwinder for use when there is no unwind data
2862 available. The most common reason to implement this macro is to unwind
2863 through signal frames.
2864
2865 This macro is called from @code{uw_frame_state_for} in
2866 @file{unwind-dw2.c}, @file{unwind-dw2-xtensa.c} and
2867 @file{unwind-ia64.c}. @var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
2868 @var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}. Examine @code{context->ra}
2869 for the address of the code being executed and @code{context->cfa} for
2870 the stack pointer value. If the frame can be decoded, the register
2871 save addresses should be updated in @var{fs} and the macro should
2872 evaluate to @code{_URC_NO_REASON}. If the frame cannot be decoded,
2873 the macro should evaluate to @code{_URC_END_OF_STACK}.
2874
2875 For proper signal handling in Java this macro is accompanied by
2876 @code{MAKE_THROW_FRAME}, defined in @file{libjava/include/*-signal.h} headers.
2877 @end defmac
2878
2879 @defmac MD_HANDLE_UNWABI (@var{context}, @var{fs})
2880 This macro allows the target to add operating system specific code to the
2881 call-frame unwinder to handle the IA-64 @code{.unwabi} unwinding directive,
2882 usually used for signal or interrupt frames.
2883
2884 This macro is called from @code{uw_update_context} in libgcc's
2885 @file{unwind-ia64.c}. @var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
2886 @var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}. Examine @code{fs->unwabi}
2887 for the abi and context in the @code{.unwabi} directive. If the
2888 @code{.unwabi} directive can be handled, the register save addresses should
2889 be updated in @var{fs}.
2890 @end defmac
2891
2892 @defmac TARGET_USES_WEAK_UNWIND_INFO
2893 A C expression that evaluates to true if the target requires unwind
2894 info to be given comdat linkage. Define it to be @code{1} if comdat
2895 linkage is necessary. The default is @code{0}.
2896 @end defmac
2897
2898 @node Stack Checking
2899 @subsection Specifying How Stack Checking is Done
2900
2901 GCC will check that stack references are within the boundaries of the
2902 stack, if the option @option{-fstack-check} is specified, in one of
2903 three ways:
2904
2905 @enumerate
2906 @item
2907 If the value of the @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC
2908 will assume that you have arranged for full stack checking to be done
2909 at appropriate places in the configuration files. GCC will not do
2910 other special processing.
2911
2912 @item
2913 If @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} is zero and the value of the
2914 @code{STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC will assume
2915 that you have arranged for static stack checking (checking of the
2916 static stack frame of functions) to be done at appropriate places
2917 in the configuration files. GCC will only emit code to do dynamic
2918 stack checking (checking on dynamic stack allocations) using the third
2919 approach below.
2920
2921 @item
2922 If neither of the above are true, GCC will generate code to periodically
2923 ``probe'' the stack pointer using the values of the macros defined below.
2924 @end enumerate
2925
2926 If neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined,
2927 GCC will change its allocation strategy for large objects if the option
2928 @option{-fstack-check} is specified: they will always be allocated
2929 dynamically if their size exceeds @code{STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE} bytes.
2930
2931 @defmac STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2932 A nonzero value if stack checking is done by the configuration files in a
2933 machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if stack checking
2934 is required by the ABI of your machine or if you would like to do stack
2935 checking in some more efficient way than the generic approach. The default
2936 value of this macro is zero.
2937 @end defmac
2938
2939 @defmac STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN
2940 A nonzero value if static stack checking is done by the configuration files
2941 in a machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if you would
2942 like to do static stack checking in some more efficient way than the generic
2943 approach. The default value of this macro is zero.
2944 @end defmac
2945
2946 @defmac STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL_EXP
2947 An integer specifying the interval at which GCC must generate stack probe
2948 instructions, defined as 2 raised to this integer. You will normally
2949 define this macro so that the interval be no larger than the size of
2950 the ``guard pages'' at the end of a stack area. The default value
2951 of 12 (4096-byte interval) is suitable for most systems.
2952 @end defmac
2953
2954 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MOVING_SP
2955 An integer which is nonzero if GCC should move the stack pointer page by page
2956 when doing probes. This can be necessary on systems where the stack pointer
2957 contains the bottom address of the memory area accessible to the executing
2958 thread at any point in time. In this situation an alternate signal stack
2959 is required in order to be able to recover from a stack overflow. The
2960 default value of this macro is zero.
2961 @end defmac
2962
2963 @defmac STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2964 The number of bytes of stack needed to recover from a stack overflow, for
2965 languages where such a recovery is supported. The default value of 4KB/8KB
2966 with the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling mechanism and
2967 8KB/12KB with other exception handling mechanisms should be adequate for most
2968 architectures and operating systems.
2969 @end defmac
2970
2971 The following macros are relevant only if neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2972 nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined; you can omit them altogether
2973 in the opposite case.
2974
2975 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
2976 The maximum size of a stack frame, in bytes. GCC will generate probe
2977 instructions in non-leaf functions to ensure at least this many bytes of
2978 stack are available. If a stack frame is larger than this size, stack
2979 checking will not be reliable and GCC will issue a warning. The
2980 default is chosen so that GCC only generates one instruction on most
2981 systems. You should normally not change the default value of this macro.
2982 @end defmac
2983
2984 @defmac STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
2985 GCC uses this value to generate the above warning message. It
2986 represents the amount of fixed frame used by a function, not including
2987 space for any callee-saved registers, temporaries and user variables.
2988 You need only specify an upper bound for this amount and will normally
2989 use the default of four words.
2990 @end defmac
2991
2992 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
2993 The maximum size, in bytes, of an object that GCC will place in the
2994 fixed area of the stack frame when the user specifies
2995 @option{-fstack-check}.
2996 GCC computed the default from the values of the above macros and you will
2997 normally not need to override that default.
2998 @end defmac
2999
3000 @need 2000
3001 @node Frame Registers
3002 @subsection Registers That Address the Stack Frame
3003
3004 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3005 This discusses registers that address the stack frame.
3006
3007 @defmac STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
3008 The register number of the stack pointer register, which must also be a
3009 fixed register according to @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}. On most machines,
3010 the hardware determines which register this is.
3011 @end defmac
3012
3013 @defmac FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
3014 The register number of the frame pointer register, which is used to
3015 access automatic variables in the stack frame. On some machines, the
3016 hardware determines which register this is. On other machines, you can
3017 choose any register you wish for this purpose.
3018 @end defmac
3019
3020 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
3021 On some machines the offset between the frame pointer and starting
3022 offset of the automatic variables is not known until after register
3023 allocation has been done (for example, because the saved registers are
3024 between these two locations). On those machines, define
3025 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} the number of a special, fixed register to
3026 be used internally until the offset is known, and define
3027 @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} to be the actual hard register number
3028 used for the frame pointer.
3029
3030 You should define this macro only in the very rare circumstances when it
3031 is not possible to calculate the offset between the frame pointer and
3032 the automatic variables until after register allocation has been
3033 completed. When this macro is defined, you must also indicate in your
3034 definition of @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} how to eliminate
3035 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} into either @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}
3036 or @code{STACK_POINTER_REGNUM}.
3037
3038 Do not define this macro if it would be the same as
3039 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}.
3040 @end defmac
3041
3042 @defmac ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
3043 The register number of the arg pointer register, which is used to access
3044 the function's argument list. On some machines, this is the same as the
3045 frame pointer register. On some machines, the hardware determines which
3046 register this is. On other machines, you can choose any register you
3047 wish for this purpose. If this is not the same register as the frame
3048 pointer register, then you must mark it as a fixed register according to
3049 @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, or arrange to be able to eliminate it
3050 (@pxref{Elimination}).
3051 @end defmac
3052
3053 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
3054 Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
3055 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{frame_pointer_rtx} should be
3056 the same. The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
3057 == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
3058 definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
3059 @end defmac
3060
3061 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_ARG_POINTER
3062 Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
3063 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{arg_pointer_rtx} should be the
3064 same. The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM ==
3065 ARG_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
3066 definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
3067 @end defmac
3068
3069 @defmac RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
3070 The register number of the return address pointer register, which is used to
3071 access the current function's return address from the stack. On some
3072 machines, the return address is not at a fixed offset from the frame
3073 pointer or stack pointer or argument pointer. This register can be defined
3074 to point to the return address on the stack, and then be converted by
3075 @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} into either the frame pointer or stack pointer.
3076
3077 Do not define this macro unless there is no other way to get the return
3078 address from the stack.
3079 @end defmac
3080
3081 @defmac STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
3082 @defmacx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
3083 Register numbers used for passing a function's static chain pointer. If
3084 register windows are used, the register number as seen by the called
3085 function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM}, while the register
3086 number as seen by the calling function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM}. If
3087 these registers are the same, @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM} need
3088 not be defined.
3089
3090 The static chain register need not be a fixed register.
3091
3092 If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros should not be
3093 defined; instead, the @code{TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN} hook should be used.
3094 @end defmac
3095
3096 @hook TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN
3097
3098 @defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
3099 This macro specifies the maximum number of hard registers that can be
3100 saved in a call frame. This is used to size data structures used in
3101 DWARF2 exception handling.
3102
3103 Prior to GCC 3.0, this macro was needed in order to establish a stable
3104 exception handling ABI in the face of adding new hard registers for ISA
3105 extensions. In GCC 3.0 and later, the EH ABI is insulated from changes
3106 in the number of hard registers. Nevertheless, this macro can still be
3107 used to reduce the runtime memory requirements of the exception handling
3108 routines, which can be substantial if the ISA contains a lot of
3109 registers that are not call-saved.
3110
3111 If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
3112 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
3113 @end defmac
3114
3115 @defmac PRE_GCC3_DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
3116
3117 This macro is similar to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}, but is provided
3118 for backward compatibility in pre GCC 3.0 compiled code.
3119
3120 If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
3121 @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}.
3122 @end defmac
3123
3124 @defmac DWARF_REG_TO_UNWIND_COLUMN (@var{regno})
3125
3126 Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
3127 is different than the internal representation for unwind column.
3128 Given a dwarf register, this macro should return the internal unwind
3129 column number to use instead.
3130
3131 See the PowerPC's SPE target for an example.
3132 @end defmac
3133
3134 @defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (@var{regno})
3135
3136 Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
3137 used in .eh_frame or .debug_frame is different from that used in other
3138 debug info sections. Given a GCC hard register number, this macro
3139 should return the .eh_frame register number. The default is
3140 @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})}.
3141
3142 @end defmac
3143
3144 @defmac DWARF2_FRAME_REG_OUT (@var{regno}, @var{for_eh})
3145
3146 Define this macro to map register numbers held in the call frame info
3147 that GCC has collected using @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM} to those that
3148 should be output in .debug_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is zero) and
3149 .eh_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is nonzero). The default is to
3150 return @code{@var{regno}}.
3151
3152 @end defmac
3153
3154 @defmac REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT
3155
3156 Define this macro if the target stores register values as
3157 @code{_Unwind_Word} type in unwind context. It should be defined if
3158 target register size is larger than the size of @code{void *}. The
3159 default is to store register values as @code{void *} type.
3160
3161 @end defmac
3162
3163 @defmac ASSUME_EXTENDED_UNWIND_CONTEXT
3164
3165 Define this macro to be 1 if the target always uses extended unwind
3166 context with version, args_size and by_value fields. If it is undefined,
3167 it will be defined to 1 when @code{REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT} is
3168 defined and 0 otherwise.
3169
3170 @end defmac
3171
3172 @node Elimination
3173 @subsection Eliminating Frame Pointer and Arg Pointer
3174
3175 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3176 This is about eliminating the frame pointer and arg pointer.
3177
3178 @hook TARGET_FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
3179
3180 @findex get_frame_size
3181 @defmac INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET (@var{depth-var})
3182 A C statement to store in the variable @var{depth-var} the difference
3183 between the frame pointer and the stack pointer values immediately after
3184 the function prologue. The value would be computed from information
3185 such as the result of @code{get_frame_size ()} and the tables of
3186 registers @code{regs_ever_live} and @code{call_used_regs}.
3187
3188 If @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is defined, this macro will be not be used and
3189 need not be defined. Otherwise, it must be defined even if
3190 @code{TARGET_FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED} always returns true; in that
3191 case, you may set @var{depth-var} to anything.
3192 @end defmac
3193
3194 @defmac ELIMINABLE_REGS
3195 If defined, this macro specifies a table of register pairs used to
3196 eliminate unneeded registers that point into the stack frame. If it is not
3197 defined, the only elimination attempted by the compiler is to replace
3198 references to the frame pointer with references to the stack pointer.
3199
3200 The definition of this macro is a list of structure initializations, each
3201 of which specifies an original and replacement register.
3202
3203 On some machines, the position of the argument pointer is not known until
3204 the compilation is completed. In such a case, a separate hard register
3205 must be used for the argument pointer. This register can be eliminated by
3206 replacing it with either the frame pointer or the argument pointer,
3207 depending on whether or not the frame pointer has been eliminated.
3208
3209 In this case, you might specify:
3210 @smallexample
3211 #define ELIMINABLE_REGS \
3212 @{@{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3213 @{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3214 @{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}@}
3215 @end smallexample
3216
3217 Note that the elimination of the argument pointer with the stack pointer is
3218 specified first since that is the preferred elimination.
3219 @end defmac
3220
3221 @hook TARGET_CAN_ELIMINATE
3222
3223 @defmac INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg}, @var{offset-var})
3224 This macro is similar to @code{INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET}. It
3225 specifies the initial difference between the specified pair of
3226 registers. This macro must be defined if @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is
3227 defined.
3228 @end defmac
3229
3230 @node Stack Arguments
3231 @subsection Passing Function Arguments on the Stack
3232 @cindex arguments on stack
3233 @cindex stack arguments
3234
3235 The macros in this section control how arguments are passed
3236 on the stack. See the following section for other macros that
3237 control passing certain arguments in registers.
3238
3239 @hook TARGET_PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
3240
3241 @defmac PUSH_ARGS
3242 A C expression. If nonzero, push insns will be used to pass
3243 outgoing arguments.
3244 If the target machine does not have a push instruction, set it to zero.
3245 That directs GCC to use an alternate strategy: to
3246 allocate the entire argument block and then store the arguments into
3247 it. When @code{PUSH_ARGS} is nonzero, @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} must be defined too.
3248 @end defmac
3249
3250 @defmac PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
3251 A C expression. If nonzero, function arguments will be evaluated from
3252 last to first, rather than from first to last. If this macro is not
3253 defined, it defaults to @code{PUSH_ARGS} on targets where the stack
3254 and args grow in opposite directions, and 0 otherwise.
3255 @end defmac
3256
3257 @defmac PUSH_ROUNDING (@var{npushed})
3258 A C expression that is the number of bytes actually pushed onto the
3259 stack when an instruction attempts to push @var{npushed} bytes.
3260
3261 On some machines, the definition
3262
3263 @smallexample
3264 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (BYTES)
3265 @end smallexample
3266
3267 @noindent
3268 will suffice. But on other machines, instructions that appear
3269 to push one byte actually push two bytes in an attempt to maintain
3270 alignment. Then the definition should be
3271
3272 @smallexample
3273 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (((BYTES) + 1) & ~1)
3274 @end smallexample
3275
3276 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
3277 @end defmac
3278
3279 @findex outgoing_args_size
3280 @findex crtl->outgoing_args_size
3281 @defmac ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
3282 A C expression. If nonzero, the maximum amount of space required for outgoing arguments
3283 will be computed and placed into
3284 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size}. No space will be pushed
3285 onto the stack for each call; instead, the function prologue should
3286 increase the stack frame size by this amount.
3287
3288 Setting both @code{PUSH_ARGS} and @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS}
3289 is not proper.
3290 @end defmac
3291
3292 @defmac REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
3293 Define this macro if functions should assume that stack space has been
3294 allocated for arguments even when their values are passed in
3295 registers.
3296
3297 The value of this macro is the size, in bytes, of the area reserved for
3298 arguments passed in registers for the function represented by @var{fndecl},
3299 which can be zero if GCC is calling a library function.
3300 The argument @var{fndecl} can be the FUNCTION_DECL, or the type itself
3301 of the function.
3302
3303 This space can be allocated by the caller, or be a part of the
3304 machine-dependent stack frame: @code{OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} says
3305 which.
3306 @end defmac
3307 @c above is overfull. not sure what to do. --mew 5feb93 did
3308 @c something, not sure if it looks good. --mew 10feb93
3309
3310 @defmac INCOMING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
3311 Like @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}, but for incoming register arguments.
3312 Define this macro if space guaranteed when compiling a function body
3313 is different to space required when making a call, a situation that
3314 can arise with K&R style function definitions.
3315 @end defmac
3316
3317 @defmac OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fntype})
3318 Define this to a nonzero value if it is the responsibility of the
3319 caller to allocate the area reserved for arguments passed in registers
3320 when calling a function of @var{fntype}. @var{fntype} may be NULL
3321 if the function called is a library function.
3322
3323 If @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, this macro controls
3324 whether the space for these arguments counts in the value of
3325 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size}.
3326 @end defmac
3327
3328 @defmac STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
3329 Define this macro if @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is defined, but the
3330 stack parameters don't skip the area specified by it.
3331 @c i changed this, makes more sens and it should have taken care of the
3332 @c overfull.. not as specific, tho. --mew 5feb93
3333
3334 Normally, when a parameter is not passed in registers, it is placed on the
3335 stack beyond the @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} area. Defining this macro
3336 suppresses this behavior and causes the parameter to be passed on the
3337 stack in its natural location.
3338 @end defmac
3339
3340 @hook TARGET_RETURN_POPS_ARGS
3341
3342 @defmac CALL_POPS_ARGS (@var{cum})
3343 A C expression that should indicate the number of bytes a call sequence
3344 pops off the stack. It is added to the value of @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS}
3345 when compiling a function call.
3346
3347 @var{cum} is the variable in which all arguments to the called function
3348 have been accumulated.
3349
3350 On certain architectures, such as the SH5, a call trampoline is used
3351 that pops certain registers off the stack, depending on the arguments
3352 that have been passed to the function. Since this is a property of the
3353 call site, not of the called function, @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} is not
3354 appropriate.
3355 @end defmac
3356
3357 @node Register Arguments
3358 @subsection Passing Arguments in Registers
3359 @cindex arguments in registers
3360 @cindex registers arguments
3361
3362 This section describes the macros which let you control how various
3363 types of arguments are passed in registers or how they are arranged in
3364 the stack.
3365
3366 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG
3367
3368 @hook TARGET_MUST_PASS_IN_STACK
3369
3370 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG
3371
3372 @hook TARGET_USE_PSEUDO_PIC_REG
3373
3374 @hook TARGET_INIT_PIC_REG
3375
3376 @hook TARGET_ARG_PARTIAL_BYTES
3377
3378 @hook TARGET_PASS_BY_REFERENCE
3379
3380 @hook TARGET_CALLEE_COPIES
3381
3382 @defmac CUMULATIVE_ARGS
3383 A C type for declaring a variable that is used as the first argument
3384 of @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG} and other related values. For some
3385 target machines, the type @code{int} suffices and can hold the number
3386 of bytes of argument so far.
3387
3388 There is no need to record in @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} anything about the
3389 arguments that have been passed on the stack. The compiler has other
3390 variables to keep track of that. For target machines on which all
3391 arguments are passed on the stack, there is no need to store anything in
3392 @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}; however, the data structure must exist and
3393 should not be empty, so use @code{int}.
3394 @end defmac
3395
3396 @defmac OVERRIDE_ABI_FORMAT (@var{fndecl})
3397 If defined, this macro is called before generating any code for a
3398 function, but after the @var{cfun} descriptor for the function has been
3399 created. The back end may use this macro to update @var{cfun} to
3400 reflect an ABI other than that which would normally be used by default.
3401 If the compiler is generating code for a compiler-generated function,
3402 @var{fndecl} may be @code{NULL}.
3403 @end defmac
3404
3405 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname}, @var{fndecl}, @var{n_named_args})
3406 A C statement (sans semicolon) for initializing the variable
3407 @var{cum} for the state at the beginning of the argument list. The
3408 variable has type @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}. The value of @var{fntype}
3409 is the tree node for the data type of the function which will receive
3410 the args, or 0 if the args are to a compiler support library function.
3411 For direct calls that are not libcalls, @var{fndecl} contain the
3412 declaration node of the function. @var{fndecl} is also set when
3413 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used to find arguments for the function
3414 being compiled. @var{n_named_args} is set to the number of named
3415 arguments, including a structure return address if it is passed as a
3416 parameter, when making a call. When processing incoming arguments,
3417 @var{n_named_args} is set to @minus{}1.
3418
3419 When processing a call to a compiler support library function,
3420 @var{libname} identifies which one. It is a @code{symbol_ref} rtx which
3421 contains the name of the function, as a string. @var{libname} is 0 when
3422 an ordinary C function call is being processed. Thus, each time this
3423 macro is called, either @var{libname} or @var{fntype} is nonzero, but
3424 never both of them at once.
3425 @end defmac
3426
3427 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_LIBCALL_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{libname})
3428 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but only used for outgoing libcalls,
3429 it gets a @code{MODE} argument instead of @var{fntype}, that would be
3430 @code{NULL}. @var{indirect} would always be zero, too. If this macro
3431 is not defined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (cum, NULL_RTX, libname,
3432 0)} is used instead.
3433 @end defmac
3434
3435 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname})
3436 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but overrides it for the purposes of
3437 finding the arguments for the function being compiled. If this macro is
3438 undefined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used instead.
3439
3440 The value passed for @var{libname} is always 0, since library routines
3441 with special calling conventions are never compiled with GCC@. The
3442 argument @var{libname} exists for symmetry with
3443 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}.
3444 @c could use "this macro" in place of @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}, maybe.
3445 @c --mew 5feb93 i switched the order of the sentences. --mew 10feb93
3446 @end defmac
3447
3448 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE
3449
3450 @defmac FUNCTION_ARG_OFFSET (@var{mode}, @var{type})
3451 If defined, a C expression that is the number of bytes to add to the
3452 offset of the argument passed in memory. This is needed for the SPU,
3453 which passes @code{char} and @code{short} arguments in the preferred
3454 slot that is in the middle of the quad word instead of starting at the
3455 top.
3456 @end defmac
3457
3458 @defmac FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type})
3459 If defined, a C expression which determines whether, and in which direction,
3460 to pad out an argument with extra space. The value should be of type
3461 @code{enum direction}: either @code{upward} to pad above the argument,
3462 @code{downward} to pad below, or @code{none} to inhibit padding.
3463
3464 The @emph{amount} of padding is not controlled by this macro, but by the
3465 target hook @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ROUND_BOUNDARY}. It is
3466 always just enough to reach the next multiple of that boundary.
3467
3468 This macro has a default definition which is right for most systems.
3469 For little-endian machines, the default is to pad upward. For
3470 big-endian machines, the default is to pad downward for an argument of
3471 constant size shorter than an @code{int}, and upward otherwise.
3472 @end defmac
3473
3474 @defmac PAD_VARARGS_DOWN
3475 If defined, a C expression which determines whether the default
3476 implementation of va_arg will attempt to pad down before reading the
3477 next argument, if that argument is smaller than its aligned space as
3478 controlled by @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}. If this macro is not defined, all such
3479 arguments are padded down if @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN} is true.
3480 @end defmac
3481
3482 @defmac BLOCK_REG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{first})
3483 Specify padding for the last element of a block move between registers and
3484 memory. @var{first} is nonzero if this is the only element. Defining this
3485 macro allows better control of register function parameters on big-endian
3486 machines, without using @code{PARALLEL} rtl. In particular,
3487 @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK} need not test padding and mode of types in
3488 registers, as there is no longer a "wrong" part of a register; For example,
3489 a three byte aggregate may be passed in the high part of a register if so
3490 required.
3491 @end defmac
3492
3493 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY
3494
3495 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ROUND_BOUNDARY
3496
3497 @defmac FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3498 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3499 register in which function arguments are sometimes passed. This does
3500 @emph{not} include implicit arguments such as the static chain and
3501 the structure-value address. On many machines, no registers can be
3502 used for this purpose since all function arguments are pushed on the
3503 stack.
3504 @end defmac
3505
3506 @hook TARGET_SPLIT_COMPLEX_ARG
3507
3508 @hook TARGET_BUILD_BUILTIN_VA_LIST
3509
3510 @hook TARGET_ENUM_VA_LIST_P
3511
3512 @hook TARGET_FN_ABI_VA_LIST
3513
3514 @hook TARGET_CANONICAL_VA_LIST_TYPE
3515
3516 @hook TARGET_GIMPLIFY_VA_ARG_EXPR
3517
3518 @hook TARGET_VALID_POINTER_MODE
3519
3520 @hook TARGET_REF_MAY_ALIAS_ERRNO
3521
3522 @hook TARGET_SCALAR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3523
3524 @hook TARGET_VECTOR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3525
3526 @hook TARGET_ARRAY_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3527
3528 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_FLOATING_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3529
3530 @hook TARGET_SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES_FOR_MODE_P
3531
3532 @node Scalar Return
3533 @subsection How Scalar Function Values Are Returned
3534 @cindex return values in registers
3535 @cindex values, returned by functions
3536 @cindex scalars, returned as values
3537
3538 This section discusses the macros that control returning scalars as
3539 values---values that can fit in registers.
3540
3541 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE
3542
3543 @defmac FUNCTION_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
3544 This macro has been deprecated. Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} for
3545 a new target instead.
3546 @end defmac
3547
3548 @defmac LIBCALL_VALUE (@var{mode})
3549 A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a library
3550 function returns a value of mode @var{mode}.
3551
3552 Note that ``library function'' in this context means a compiler
3553 support routine, used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known
3554 specially by the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being
3555 compiled.
3556 @end defmac
3557
3558 @hook TARGET_LIBCALL_VALUE
3559
3560 @defmac FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3561 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3562 register in which the values of called function may come back.
3563
3564 A register whose use for returning values is limited to serving as the
3565 second of a pair (for a value of type @code{double}, say) need not be
3566 recognized by this macro. So for most machines, this definition
3567 suffices:
3568
3569 @smallexample
3570 #define FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P(N) ((N) == 0)
3571 @end smallexample
3572
3573 If the machine has register windows, so that the caller and the called
3574 function use different registers for the return value, this macro
3575 should recognize only the caller's register numbers.
3576
3577 This macro has been deprecated. Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P}
3578 for a new target instead.
3579 @end defmac
3580
3581 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P
3582
3583 @defmac APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
3584 Define this macro if @samp{untyped_call} and @samp{untyped_return}
3585 need more space than is implied by @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} for
3586 saving and restoring an arbitrary return value.
3587 @end defmac
3588
3589 @hook TARGET_OMIT_STRUCT_RETURN_REG
3590
3591 @hook TARGET_RETURN_IN_MSB
3592
3593 @node Aggregate Return
3594 @subsection How Large Values Are Returned
3595 @cindex aggregates as return values
3596 @cindex large return values
3597 @cindex returning aggregate values
3598 @cindex structure value address
3599
3600 When a function value's mode is @code{BLKmode} (and in some other
3601 cases), the value is not returned according to
3602 @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} (@pxref{Scalar Return}). Instead, the
3603 caller passes the address of a block of memory in which the value
3604 should be stored. This address is called the @dfn{structure value
3605 address}.
3606
3607 This section describes how to control returning structure values in
3608 memory.
3609
3610 @hook TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY
3611
3612 @defmac DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3613 Define this macro to be 1 if all structure and union return values must be
3614 in memory. Since this results in slower code, this should be defined
3615 only if needed for compatibility with other compilers or with an ABI@.
3616 If you define this macro to be 0, then the conventions used for structure
3617 and union return values are decided by the @code{TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY}
3618 target hook.
3619
3620 If not defined, this defaults to the value 1.
3621 @end defmac
3622
3623 @hook TARGET_STRUCT_VALUE_RTX
3624
3625 @defmac PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3626 Define this macro if the usual system convention on the target machine
3627 for returning structures and unions is for the called function to return
3628 the address of a static variable containing the value.
3629
3630 Do not define this if the usual system convention is for the caller to
3631 pass an address to the subroutine.
3632
3633 This macro has effect in @option{-fpcc-struct-return} mode, but it does
3634 nothing when you use @option{-freg-struct-return} mode.
3635 @end defmac
3636
3637 @hook TARGET_GET_RAW_RESULT_MODE
3638
3639 @hook TARGET_GET_RAW_ARG_MODE
3640
3641 @node Caller Saves
3642 @subsection Caller-Saves Register Allocation
3643
3644 If you enable it, GCC can save registers around function calls. This
3645 makes it possible to use call-clobbered registers to hold variables that
3646 must live across calls.
3647
3648 @defmac HARD_REGNO_CALLER_SAVE_MODE (@var{regno}, @var{nregs})
3649 A C expression specifying which mode is required for saving @var{nregs}
3650 of a pseudo-register in call-clobbered hard register @var{regno}. If
3651 @var{regno} is unsuitable for caller save, @code{VOIDmode} should be
3652 returned. For most machines this macro need not be defined since GCC
3653 will select the smallest suitable mode.
3654 @end defmac
3655
3656 @node Function Entry
3657 @subsection Function Entry and Exit
3658 @cindex function entry and exit
3659 @cindex prologue
3660 @cindex epilogue
3661
3662 This section describes the macros that output function entry
3663 (@dfn{prologue}) and exit (@dfn{epilogue}) code.
3664
3665 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE
3666
3667 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_END_PROLOGUE
3668
3669 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_BEGIN_EPILOGUE
3670
3671 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE
3672
3673 @itemize @bullet
3674 @item
3675 @findex pretend_args_size
3676 @findex crtl->args.pretend_args_size
3677 A region of @code{crtl->args.pretend_args_size} bytes of
3678 uninitialized space just underneath the first argument arriving on the
3679 stack. (This may not be at the very start of the allocated stack region
3680 if the calling sequence has pushed anything else since pushing the stack
3681 arguments. But usually, on such machines, nothing else has been pushed
3682 yet, because the function prologue itself does all the pushing.) This
3683 region is used on machines where an argument may be passed partly in
3684 registers and partly in memory, and, in some cases to support the
3685 features in @code{<stdarg.h>}.
3686
3687 @item
3688 An area of memory used to save certain registers used by the function.
3689 The size of this area, which may also include space for such things as
3690 the return address and pointers to previous stack frames, is
3691 machine-specific and usually depends on which registers have been used
3692 in the function. Machines with register windows often do not require
3693 a save area.
3694
3695 @item
3696 A region of at least @var{size} bytes, possibly rounded up to an allocation
3697 boundary, to contain the local variables of the function. On some machines,
3698 this region and the save area may occur in the opposite order, with the
3699 save area closer to the top of the stack.
3700
3701 @item
3702 @cindex @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} and stack frames
3703 Optionally, when @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, a region of
3704 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size} bytes to be used for outgoing
3705 argument lists of the function. @xref{Stack Arguments}.
3706 @end itemize
3707
3708 @defmac EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3709 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if the return
3710 instruction or the function epilogue ignores the value of the stack
3711 pointer; in other words, if it is safe to delete an instruction to
3712 adjust the stack pointer before a return from the function. The
3713 default is 0.
3714
3715 Note that this macro's value is relevant only for functions for which
3716 frame pointers are maintained. It is never safe to delete a final
3717 stack adjustment in a function that has no frame pointer, and the
3718 compiler knows this regardless of @code{EXIT_IGNORE_STACK}.
3719 @end defmac
3720
3721 @defmac EPILOGUE_USES (@var{regno})
3722 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3723 used by the epilogue or the @samp{return} pattern. The stack and frame
3724 pointer registers are already assumed to be used as needed.
3725 @end defmac
3726
3727 @defmac EH_USES (@var{regno})
3728 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3729 used by the exception handling mechanism, and so should be considered live
3730 on entry to an exception edge.
3731 @end defmac
3732
3733 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3734
3735 @hook TARGET_ASM_CAN_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3736
3737 @node Profiling
3738 @subsection Generating Code for Profiling
3739 @cindex profiling, code generation
3740
3741 These macros will help you generate code for profiling.
3742
3743 @defmac FUNCTION_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3744 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3745 assembler code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount}.
3746
3747 @findex mcount
3748 The details of how @code{mcount} expects to be called are determined by
3749 your operating system environment, not by GCC@. To figure them out,
3750 compile a small program for profiling using the system's installed C
3751 compiler and look at the assembler code that results.
3752
3753 Older implementations of @code{mcount} expect the address of a counter
3754 variable to be loaded into some register. The name of this variable is
3755 @samp{LP} followed by the number @var{labelno}, so you would generate
3756 the name using @samp{LP%d} in a @code{fprintf}.
3757 @end defmac
3758
3759 @defmac PROFILE_HOOK
3760 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some assembly
3761 code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount} even the target does
3762 not support profiling.
3763 @end defmac
3764
3765 @defmac NO_PROFILE_COUNTERS
3766 Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if the
3767 @code{mcount} subroutine on your system does not need a counter variable
3768 allocated for each function. This is true for almost all modern
3769 implementations. If you define this macro, you must not use the
3770 @var{labelno} argument to @code{FUNCTION_PROFILER}.
3771 @end defmac
3772
3773 @defmac PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3774 Define this macro if the code for function profiling should come before
3775 the function prologue. Normally, the profiling code comes after.
3776 @end defmac
3777
3778 @hook TARGET_KEEP_LEAF_WHEN_PROFILED
3779
3780 @node Tail Calls
3781 @subsection Permitting tail calls
3782 @cindex tail calls
3783
3784 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL
3785
3786 @hook TARGET_EXTRA_LIVE_ON_ENTRY
3787
3788 @hook TARGET_SET_UP_BY_PROLOGUE
3789
3790 @hook TARGET_WARN_FUNC_RETURN
3791
3792 @node Stack Smashing Protection
3793 @subsection Stack smashing protection
3794 @cindex stack smashing protection
3795
3796 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_GUARD
3797
3798 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_FAIL
3799
3800 @hook TARGET_SUPPORTS_SPLIT_STACK
3801
3802 @node Miscellaneous Register Hooks
3803 @subsection Miscellaneous register hooks
3804 @cindex miscellaneous register hooks
3805
3806 @hook TARGET_CALL_FUSAGE_CONTAINS_NON_CALLEE_CLOBBERS
3807
3808 @node Varargs
3809 @section Implementing the Varargs Macros
3810 @cindex varargs implementation
3811
3812 GCC comes with an implementation of @code{<varargs.h>} and
3813 @code{<stdarg.h>} that work without change on machines that pass arguments
3814 on the stack. Other machines require their own implementations of
3815 varargs, and the two machine independent header files must have
3816 conditionals to include it.
3817
3818 ISO @code{<stdarg.h>} differs from traditional @code{<varargs.h>} mainly in
3819 the calling convention for @code{va_start}. The traditional
3820 implementation takes just one argument, which is the variable in which
3821 to store the argument pointer. The ISO implementation of
3822 @code{va_start} takes an additional second argument. The user is
3823 supposed to write the last named argument of the function here.
3824
3825 However, @code{va_start} should not use this argument. The way to find
3826 the end of the named arguments is with the built-in functions described
3827 below.
3828
3829 @defmac __builtin_saveregs ()
3830 Use this built-in function to save the argument registers in memory so
3831 that the varargs mechanism can access them. Both ISO and traditional
3832 versions of @code{va_start} must use @code{__builtin_saveregs}, unless
3833 you use @code{TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} (see below) instead.
3834
3835 On some machines, @code{__builtin_saveregs} is open-coded under the
3836 control of the target hook @code{TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. On
3837 other machines, it calls a routine written in assembler language,
3838 found in @file{libgcc2.c}.
3839
3840 Code generated for the call to @code{__builtin_saveregs} appears at the
3841 beginning of the function, as opposed to where the call to
3842 @code{__builtin_saveregs} is written, regardless of what the code is.
3843 This is because the registers must be saved before the function starts
3844 to use them for its own purposes.
3845 @c i rewrote the first sentence above to fix an overfull hbox. --mew
3846 @c 10feb93
3847 @end defmac
3848
3849 @defmac __builtin_next_arg (@var{lastarg})
3850 This builtin returns the address of the first anonymous stack
3851 argument, as type @code{void *}. If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, it
3852 returns the address of the location above the first anonymous stack
3853 argument. Use it in @code{va_start} to initialize the pointer for
3854 fetching arguments from the stack. Also use it in @code{va_start} to
3855 verify that the second parameter @var{lastarg} is the last named argument
3856 of the current function.
3857 @end defmac
3858
3859 @defmac __builtin_classify_type (@var{object})
3860 Since each machine has its own conventions for which data types are
3861 passed in which kind of register, your implementation of @code{va_arg}
3862 has to embody these conventions. The easiest way to categorize the
3863 specified data type is to use @code{__builtin_classify_type} together
3864 with @code{sizeof} and @code{__alignof__}.
3865
3866 @code{__builtin_classify_type} ignores the value of @var{object},
3867 considering only its data type. It returns an integer describing what
3868 kind of type that is---integer, floating, pointer, structure, and so on.
3869
3870 The file @file{typeclass.h} defines an enumeration that you can use to
3871 interpret the values of @code{__builtin_classify_type}.
3872 @end defmac
3873
3874 These machine description macros help implement varargs:
3875
3876 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS
3877
3878 @hook TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS
3879
3880 @hook TARGET_STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
3881
3882 @hook TARGET_CALL_ARGS
3883
3884 @hook TARGET_END_CALL_ARGS
3885
3886 @hook TARGET_PRETEND_OUTGOING_VARARGS_NAMED
3887
3888 @hook TARGET_LOAD_BOUNDS_FOR_ARG
3889
3890 @hook TARGET_STORE_BOUNDS_FOR_ARG
3891
3892 @hook TARGET_LOAD_RETURNED_BOUNDS
3893
3894 @hook TARGET_STORE_RETURNED_BOUNDS
3895
3896 @hook TARGET_CHKP_FUNCTION_VALUE_BOUNDS
3897
3898 @hook TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARG_BOUNDS
3899
3900 @node Trampolines
3901 @section Trampolines for Nested Functions
3902 @cindex trampolines for nested functions
3903 @cindex nested functions, trampolines for
3904
3905 A @dfn{trampoline} is a small piece of code that is created at run time
3906 when the address of a nested function is taken. It normally resides on
3907 the stack, in the stack frame of the containing function. These macros
3908 tell GCC how to generate code to allocate and initialize a
3909 trampoline.
3910
3911 The instructions in the trampoline must do two things: load a constant
3912 address into the static chain register, and jump to the real address of
3913 the nested function. On CISC machines such as the m68k, this requires
3914 two instructions, a move immediate and a jump. Then the two addresses
3915 exist in the trampoline as word-long immediate operands. On RISC
3916 machines, it is often necessary to load each address into a register in
3917 two parts. Then pieces of each address form separate immediate
3918 operands.
3919
3920 The code generated to initialize the trampoline must store the variable
3921 parts---the static chain value and the function address---into the
3922 immediate operands of the instructions. On a CISC machine, this is
3923 simply a matter of copying each address to a memory reference at the
3924 proper offset from the start of the trampoline. On a RISC machine, it
3925 may be necessary to take out pieces of the address and store them
3926 separately.
3927
3928 @hook TARGET_ASM_TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE
3929
3930 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3931 Return the section into which the trampoline template is to be placed
3932 (@pxref{Sections}). The default value is @code{readonly_data_section}.
3933 @end defmac
3934
3935 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3936 A C expression for the size in bytes of the trampoline, as an integer.
3937 @end defmac
3938
3939 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3940 Alignment required for trampolines, in bits.
3941
3942 If you don't define this macro, the value of @code{FUNCTION_ALIGNMENT}
3943 is used for aligning trampolines.
3944 @end defmac
3945
3946 @hook TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_INIT
3947
3948 @hook TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_ADJUST_ADDRESS
3949
3950 Implementing trampolines is difficult on many machines because they have
3951 separate instruction and data caches. Writing into a stack location
3952 fails to clear the memory in the instruction cache, so when the program
3953 jumps to that location, it executes the old contents.
3954
3955 Here are two possible solutions. One is to clear the relevant parts of
3956 the instruction cache whenever a trampoline is set up. The other is to
3957 make all trampolines identical, by having them jump to a standard
3958 subroutine. The former technique makes trampoline execution faster; the
3959 latter makes initialization faster.
3960
3961 To clear the instruction cache when a trampoline is initialized, define
3962 the following macro.
3963
3964 @defmac CLEAR_INSN_CACHE (@var{beg}, @var{end})
3965 If defined, expands to a C expression clearing the @emph{instruction
3966 cache} in the specified interval. The definition of this macro would
3967 typically be a series of @code{asm} statements. Both @var{beg} and
3968 @var{end} are both pointer expressions.
3969 @end defmac
3970
3971 To use a standard subroutine, define the following macro. In addition,
3972 you must make sure that the instructions in a trampoline fill an entire
3973 cache line with identical instructions, or else ensure that the
3974 beginning of the trampoline code is always aligned at the same point in
3975 its cache line. Look in @file{m68k.h} as a guide.
3976
3977 @defmac TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
3978 Define this macro if trampolines need a special subroutine to do their
3979 work. The macro should expand to a series of @code{asm} statements
3980 which will be compiled with GCC@. They go in a library function named
3981 @code{__transfer_from_trampoline}.
3982
3983 If you need to avoid executing the ordinary prologue code of a compiled
3984 C function when you jump to the subroutine, you can do so by placing a
3985 special label of your own in the assembler code. Use one @code{asm}
3986 statement to generate an assembler label, and another to make the label
3987 global. Then trampolines can use that label to jump directly to your
3988 special assembler code.
3989 @end defmac
3990
3991 @node Library Calls
3992 @section Implicit Calls to Library Routines
3993 @cindex library subroutine names
3994 @cindex @file{libgcc.a}
3995
3996 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3997 Here is an explanation of implicit calls to library routines.
3998
3999 @defmac DECLARE_LIBRARY_RENAMES
4000 This macro, if defined, should expand to a piece of C code that will get
4001 expanded when compiling functions for libgcc.a. It can be used to
4002 provide alternate names for GCC's internal library functions if there
4003 are ABI-mandated names that the compiler should provide.
4004 @end defmac
4005
4006 @findex set_optab_libfunc
4007 @findex init_one_libfunc
4008 @hook TARGET_INIT_LIBFUNCS
4009
4010 @hook TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX
4011
4012 @defmac FLOAT_LIB_COMPARE_RETURNS_BOOL (@var{mode}, @var{comparison})
4013 This macro should return @code{true} if the library routine that
4014 implements the floating point comparison operator @var{comparison} in
4015 mode @var{mode} will return a boolean, and @var{false} if it will
4016 return a tristate.
4017
4018 GCC's own floating point libraries return tristates from the
4019 comparison operators, so the default returns false always. Most ports
4020 don't need to define this macro.
4021 @end defmac
4022
4023 @defmac TARGET_LIB_INT_CMP_BIASED
4024 This macro should evaluate to @code{true} if the integer comparison
4025 functions (like @code{__cmpdi2}) return 0 to indicate that the first
4026 operand is smaller than the second, 1 to indicate that they are equal,
4027 and 2 to indicate that the first operand is greater than the second.
4028 If this macro evaluates to @code{false} the comparison functions return
4029 @minus{}1, 0, and 1 instead of 0, 1, and 2. If the target uses the routines
4030 in @file{libgcc.a}, you do not need to define this macro.
4031 @end defmac
4032
4033 @defmac TARGET_HAS_NO_HW_DIVIDE
4034 This macro should be defined if the target has no hardware divide
4035 instructions. If this macro is defined, GCC will use an algorithm which
4036 make use of simple logical and arithmetic operations for 64-bit
4037 division. If the macro is not defined, GCC will use an algorithm which
4038 make use of a 64-bit by 32-bit divide primitive.
4039 @end defmac
4040
4041 @cindex @code{EDOM}, implicit usage
4042 @findex matherr
4043 @defmac TARGET_EDOM
4044 The value of @code{EDOM} on the target machine, as a C integer constant
4045 expression. If you don't define this macro, GCC does not attempt to
4046 deposit the value of @code{EDOM} into @code{errno} directly. Look in
4047 @file{/usr/include/errno.h} to find the value of @code{EDOM} on your
4048 system.
4049
4050 If you do not define @code{TARGET_EDOM}, then compiled code reports
4051 domain errors by calling the library function and letting it report the
4052 error. If mathematical functions on your system use @code{matherr} when
4053 there is an error, then you should leave @code{TARGET_EDOM} undefined so
4054 that @code{matherr} is used normally.
4055 @end defmac
4056
4057 @cindex @code{errno}, implicit usage
4058 @defmac GEN_ERRNO_RTX
4059 Define this macro as a C expression to create an rtl expression that
4060 refers to the global ``variable'' @code{errno}. (On certain systems,
4061 @code{errno} may not actually be a variable.) If you don't define this
4062 macro, a reasonable default is used.
4063 @end defmac
4064
4065 @hook TARGET_LIBC_HAS_FUNCTION
4066
4067 @defmac NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
4068 Set this macro to 1 to use the "NeXT" Objective-C message sending conventions
4069 by default. This calling convention involves passing the object, the selector
4070 and the method arguments all at once to the method-lookup library function.
4071 This is the usual setting when targeting Darwin/Mac OS X systems, which have
4072 the NeXT runtime installed.
4073
4074 If the macro is set to 0, the "GNU" Objective-C message sending convention
4075 will be used by default. This convention passes just the object and the
4076 selector to the method-lookup function, which returns a pointer to the method.
4077
4078 In either case, it remains possible to select code-generation for the alternate
4079 scheme, by means of compiler command line switches.
4080 @end defmac
4081
4082 @node Addressing Modes
4083 @section Addressing Modes
4084 @cindex addressing modes
4085
4086 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4087 This is about addressing modes.
4088
4089 @defmac HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
4090 @defmacx HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
4091 @defmacx HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
4092 @defmacx HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
4093 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre-increment,
4094 pre-decrement, post-increment, or post-decrement addressing respectively.
4095 @end defmac
4096
4097 @defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_DISP
4098 @defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_DISP
4099 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
4100 post-address side-effect generation involving constants other than
4101 the size of the memory operand.
4102 @end defmac
4103
4104 @defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_REG
4105 @defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_REG
4106 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
4107 post-address side-effect generation involving a register displacement.
4108 @end defmac
4109
4110 @defmac CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (@var{x})
4111 A C expression that is 1 if the RTX @var{x} is a constant which
4112 is a valid address. On most machines the default definition of
4113 @code{(CONSTANT_P (@var{x}) && GET_CODE (@var{x}) != CONST_DOUBLE)}
4114 is acceptable, but a few machines are more restrictive as to which
4115 constant addresses are supported.
4116 @end defmac
4117
4118 @defmac CONSTANT_P (@var{x})
4119 @code{CONSTANT_P}, which is defined by target-independent code,
4120 accepts integer-values expressions whose values are not explicitly
4121 known, such as @code{symbol_ref}, @code{label_ref}, and @code{high}
4122 expressions and @code{const} arithmetic expressions, in addition to
4123 @code{const_int} and @code{const_double} expressions.
4124 @end defmac
4125
4126 @defmac MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
4127 A number, the maximum number of registers that can appear in a valid
4128 memory address. Note that it is up to you to specify a value equal to
4129 the maximum number that @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} would ever
4130 accept.
4131 @end defmac
4132
4133 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P
4134
4135 @defmac TARGET_MEM_CONSTRAINT
4136 A single character to be used instead of the default @code{'m'}
4137 character for general memory addresses. This defines the constraint
4138 letter which matches the memory addresses accepted by
4139 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P}. Define this macro if you want to
4140 support new address formats in your back end without changing the
4141 semantics of the @code{'m'} constraint. This is necessary in order to
4142 preserve functionality of inline assembly constructs using the
4143 @code{'m'} constraint.
4144 @end defmac
4145
4146 @defmac FIND_BASE_TERM (@var{x})
4147 A C expression to determine the base term of address @var{x},
4148 or to provide a simplified version of @var{x} from which @file{alias.c}
4149 can easily find the base term. This macro is used in only two places:
4150 @code{find_base_value} and @code{find_base_term} in @file{alias.c}.
4151
4152 It is always safe for this macro to not be defined. It exists so
4153 that alias analysis can understand machine-dependent addresses.
4154
4155 The typical use of this macro is to handle addresses containing
4156 a label_ref or symbol_ref within an UNSPEC@.
4157 @end defmac
4158
4159 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4160
4161 @defmac LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{opnum}, @var{type}, @var{ind_levels}, @var{win})
4162 A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x}, which is an address
4163 that needs reloading, with a valid memory address for an operand of mode
4164 @var{mode}. @var{win} will be a C statement label elsewhere in the code.
4165 It is not necessary to define this macro, but it might be useful for
4166 performance reasons.
4167
4168 For example, on the i386, it is sometimes possible to use a single
4169 reload register instead of two by reloading a sum of two pseudo
4170 registers into a register. On the other hand, for number of RISC
4171 processors offsets are limited so that often an intermediate address
4172 needs to be generated in order to address a stack slot. By defining
4173 @code{LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS} appropriately, the intermediate addresses
4174 generated for adjacent some stack slots can be made identical, and thus
4175 be shared.
4176
4177 @emph{Note}: This macro should be used with caution. It is necessary
4178 to know something of how reload works in order to effectively use this,
4179 and it is quite easy to produce macros that build in too much knowledge
4180 of reload internals.
4181
4182 @emph{Note}: This macro must be able to reload an address created by a
4183 previous invocation of this macro. If it fails to handle such addresses
4184 then the compiler may generate incorrect code or abort.
4185
4186 @findex push_reload
4187 The macro definition should use @code{push_reload} to indicate parts that
4188 need reloading; @var{opnum}, @var{type} and @var{ind_levels} are usually
4189 suitable to be passed unaltered to @code{push_reload}.
4190
4191 The code generated by this macro must not alter the substructure of
4192 @var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4193 should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4194 This also applies to parts that you change indirectly by calling
4195 @code{push_reload}.
4196
4197 @findex strict_memory_address_p
4198 The macro definition may use @code{strict_memory_address_p} to test if
4199 the address has become legitimate.
4200
4201 @findex copy_rtx
4202 If you want to change only a part of @var{x}, one standard way of doing
4203 this is to use @code{copy_rtx}. Note, however, that it unshares only a
4204 single level of rtl. Thus, if the part to be changed is not at the
4205 top level, you'll need to replace first the top level.
4206 It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4207 address; but often a machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4208 @end defmac
4209
4210 @hook TARGET_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS_P
4211
4212 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P
4213
4214 @hook TARGET_DELEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4215
4216 @hook TARGET_CONST_NOT_OK_FOR_DEBUG_P
4217
4218 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_FORCE_CONST_MEM
4219
4220 @hook TARGET_USE_BLOCKS_FOR_CONSTANT_P
4221
4222 @hook TARGET_USE_BLOCKS_FOR_DECL_P
4223
4224 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_RECIPROCAL
4225
4226 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_MASK_FOR_LOAD
4227
4228 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZATION_COST
4229
4230 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT_REACHABLE
4231
4232 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_VEC_PERM_CONST_OK
4233
4234 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_CONVERSION
4235
4236 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZED_FUNCTION
4237
4238 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_MD_VECTORIZED_FUNCTION
4239
4240 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_SUPPORT_VECTOR_MISALIGNMENT
4241
4242 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_PREFERRED_SIMD_MODE
4243
4244 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_AUTOVECTORIZE_VECTOR_SIZES
4245
4246 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_GET_MASK_MODE
4247
4248 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_INIT_COST
4249
4250 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_ADD_STMT_COST
4251
4252 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_FINISH_COST
4253
4254 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_DESTROY_COST_DATA
4255
4256 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_GATHER
4257
4258 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_SCATTER
4259
4260 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_COMPUTE_VECSIZE_AND_SIMDLEN
4261
4262 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_ADJUST
4263
4264 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_USABLE
4265
4266 @hook TARGET_GOACC_VALIDATE_DIMS
4267
4268 @hook TARGET_GOACC_DIM_LIMIT
4269
4270 @hook TARGET_GOACC_FORK_JOIN
4271
4272 @hook TARGET_GOACC_REDUCTION
4273
4274 @node Anchored Addresses
4275 @section Anchored Addresses
4276 @cindex anchored addresses
4277 @cindex @option{-fsection-anchors}
4278
4279 GCC usually addresses every static object as a separate entity.
4280 For example, if we have:
4281
4282 @smallexample
4283 static int a, b, c;
4284 int foo (void) @{ return a + b + c; @}
4285 @end smallexample
4286
4287 the code for @code{foo} will usually calculate three separate symbolic
4288 addresses: those of @code{a}, @code{b} and @code{c}. On some targets,
4289 it would be better to calculate just one symbolic address and access
4290 the three variables relative to it. The equivalent pseudocode would
4291 be something like:
4292
4293 @smallexample
4294 int foo (void)
4295 @{
4296 register int *xr = &x;
4297 return xr[&a - &x] + xr[&b - &x] + xr[&c - &x];
4298 @}
4299 @end smallexample
4300
4301 (which isn't valid C). We refer to shared addresses like @code{x} as
4302 ``section anchors''. Their use is controlled by @option{-fsection-anchors}.
4303
4304 The hooks below describe the target properties that GCC needs to know
4305 in order to make effective use of section anchors. It won't use
4306 section anchors at all unless either @code{TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET}
4307 or @code{TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET} is set to a nonzero value.
4308
4309 @hook TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET
4310
4311 @hook TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET
4312
4313 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ANCHOR
4314
4315 @hook TARGET_USE_ANCHORS_FOR_SYMBOL_P
4316
4317 @node Condition Code
4318 @section Condition Code Status
4319 @cindex condition code status
4320
4321 The macros in this section can be split in two families, according to the
4322 two ways of representing condition codes in GCC.
4323
4324 The first representation is the so called @code{(cc0)} representation
4325 (@pxref{Jump Patterns}), where all instructions can have an implicit
4326 clobber of the condition codes. The second is the condition code
4327 register representation, which provides better schedulability for
4328 architectures that do have a condition code register, but on which
4329 most instructions do not affect it. The latter category includes
4330 most RISC machines.
4331
4332 The implicit clobbering poses a strong restriction on the placement of
4333 the definition and use of the condition code. In the past the definition
4334 and use were always adjacent. However, recent changes to support trapping
4335 arithmatic may result in the definition and user being in different blocks.
4336 Thus, there may be a @code{NOTE_INSN_BASIC_BLOCK} between them. Additionally,
4337 the definition may be the source of exception handling edges.
4338
4339 These restrictions can prevent important
4340 optimizations on some machines. For example, on the IBM RS/6000, there
4341 is a delay for taken branches unless the condition code register is set
4342 three instructions earlier than the conditional branch. The instruction
4343 scheduler cannot perform this optimization if it is not permitted to
4344 separate the definition and use of the condition code register.
4345
4346 For this reason, it is possible and suggested to use a register to
4347 represent the condition code for new ports. If there is a specific
4348 condition code register in the machine, use a hard register. If the
4349 condition code or comparison result can be placed in any general register,
4350 or if there are multiple condition registers, use a pseudo register.
4351 Registers used to store the condition code value will usually have a mode
4352 that is in class @code{MODE_CC}.
4353
4354 Alternatively, you can use @code{BImode} if the comparison operator is
4355 specified already in the compare instruction. In this case, you are not
4356 interested in most macros in this section.
4357
4358 @menu
4359 * CC0 Condition Codes:: Old style representation of condition codes.
4360 * MODE_CC Condition Codes:: Modern representation of condition codes.
4361 @end menu
4362
4363 @node CC0 Condition Codes
4364 @subsection Representation of condition codes using @code{(cc0)}
4365 @findex cc0
4366
4367 @findex cc_status
4368 The file @file{conditions.h} defines a variable @code{cc_status} to
4369 describe how the condition code was computed (in case the interpretation of
4370 the condition code depends on the instruction that it was set by). This
4371 variable contains the RTL expressions on which the condition code is
4372 currently based, and several standard flags.
4373
4374 Sometimes additional machine-specific flags must be defined in the machine
4375 description header file. It can also add additional machine-specific
4376 information by defining @code{CC_STATUS_MDEP}.
4377
4378 @defmac CC_STATUS_MDEP
4379 C code for a data type which is used for declaring the @code{mdep}
4380 component of @code{cc_status}. It defaults to @code{int}.
4381
4382 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4383 @end defmac
4384
4385 @defmac CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4386 A C expression to initialize the @code{mdep} field to ``empty''.
4387 The default definition does nothing, since most machines don't use
4388 the field anyway. If you want to use the field, you should probably
4389 define this macro to initialize it.
4390
4391 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4392 @end defmac
4393
4394 @defmac NOTICE_UPDATE_CC (@var{exp}, @var{insn})
4395 A C compound statement to set the components of @code{cc_status}
4396 appropriately for an insn @var{insn} whose body is @var{exp}. It is
4397 this macro's responsibility to recognize insns that set the condition
4398 code as a byproduct of other activity as well as those that explicitly
4399 set @code{(cc0)}.
4400
4401 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4402
4403 If there are insns that do not set the condition code but do alter
4404 other machine registers, this macro must check to see whether they
4405 invalidate the expressions that the condition code is recorded as
4406 reflecting. For example, on the 68000, insns that store in address
4407 registers do not set the condition code, which means that usually
4408 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} can leave @code{cc_status} unaltered for such
4409 insns. But suppose that the previous insn set the condition code
4410 based on location @samp{a4@@(102)} and the current insn stores a new
4411 value in @samp{a4}. Although the condition code is not changed by
4412 this, it will no longer be true that it reflects the contents of
4413 @samp{a4@@(102)}. Therefore, @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must alter
4414 @code{cc_status} in this case to say that nothing is known about the
4415 condition code value.
4416
4417 The definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must be prepared to deal
4418 with the results of peephole optimization: insns whose patterns are
4419 @code{parallel} RTXs containing various @code{reg}, @code{mem} or
4420 constants which are just the operands. The RTL structure of these
4421 insns is not sufficient to indicate what the insns actually do. What
4422 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} should do when it sees one is just to run
4423 @code{CC_STATUS_INIT}.
4424
4425 A possible definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} is to call a function
4426 that looks at an attribute (@pxref{Insn Attributes}) named, for example,
4427 @samp{cc}. This avoids having detailed information about patterns in
4428 two places, the @file{md} file and in @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC}.
4429 @end defmac
4430
4431 @node MODE_CC Condition Codes
4432 @subsection Representation of condition codes using registers
4433 @findex CCmode
4434 @findex MODE_CC
4435
4436 @defmac SELECT_CC_MODE (@var{op}, @var{x}, @var{y})
4437 On many machines, the condition code may be produced by other instructions
4438 than compares, for example the branch can use directly the condition
4439 code set by a subtract instruction. However, on some machines
4440 when the condition code is set this way some bits (such as the overflow
4441 bit) are not set in the same way as a test instruction, so that a different
4442 branch instruction must be used for some conditional branches. When
4443 this happens, use the machine mode of the condition code register to
4444 record different formats of the condition code register. Modes can
4445 also be used to record which compare instruction (e.g. a signed or an
4446 unsigned comparison) produced the condition codes.
4447
4448 If other modes than @code{CCmode} are required, add them to
4449 @file{@var{machine}-modes.def} and define @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} to choose
4450 a mode given an operand of a compare. This is needed because the modes
4451 have to be chosen not only during RTL generation but also, for example,
4452 by instruction combination. The result of @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} should
4453 be consistent with the mode used in the patterns; for example to support
4454 the case of the add on the SPARC discussed above, we have the pattern
4455
4456 @smallexample
4457 (define_insn ""
4458 [(set (reg:CC_NOOV 0)
4459 (compare:CC_NOOV
4460 (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "%r")
4461 (match_operand:SI 1 "arith_operand" "rI"))
4462 (const_int 0)))]
4463 ""
4464 "@dots{}")
4465 @end smallexample
4466
4467 @noindent
4468 together with a @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} that returns @code{CC_NOOVmode}
4469 for comparisons whose argument is a @code{plus}:
4470
4471 @smallexample
4472 #define SELECT_CC_MODE(OP,X,Y) \
4473 (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (X)) == MODE_FLOAT \
4474 ? ((OP == LT || OP == LE || OP == GT || OP == GE) \
4475 ? CCFPEmode : CCFPmode) \
4476 : ((GET_CODE (X) == PLUS || GET_CODE (X) == MINUS \
4477 || GET_CODE (X) == NEG || GET_CODE (x) == ASHIFT) \
4478 ? CC_NOOVmode : CCmode))
4479 @end smallexample
4480
4481 Another reason to use modes is to retain information on which operands
4482 were used by the comparison; see @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE} later in
4483 this section.
4484
4485 You should define this macro if and only if you define extra CC modes
4486 in @file{@var{machine}-modes.def}.
4487 @end defmac
4488
4489 @hook TARGET_CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON
4490
4491 @defmac REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})
4492 A C expression whose value is one if it is always safe to reverse a
4493 comparison whose mode is @var{mode}. If @code{SELECT_CC_MODE}
4494 can ever return @var{mode} for a floating-point inequality comparison,
4495 then @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} must be zero.
4496
4497 You need not define this macro if it would always returns zero or if the
4498 floating-point format is anything other than @code{IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT}.
4499 For example, here is the definition used on the SPARC, where floating-point
4500 inequality comparisons are given either @code{CCFPEmode} or @code{CCFPmode}:
4501
4502 @smallexample
4503 #define REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE(MODE) \
4504 ((MODE) != CCFPEmode && (MODE) != CCFPmode)
4505 @end smallexample
4506 @end defmac
4507
4508 @defmac REVERSE_CONDITION (@var{code}, @var{mode})
4509 A C expression whose value is reversed condition code of the @var{code} for
4510 comparison done in CC_MODE @var{mode}. The macro is used only in case
4511 @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} is nonzero. Define this macro in case
4512 machine has some non-standard way how to reverse certain conditionals. For
4513 instance in case all floating point conditions are non-trapping, compiler may
4514 freely convert unordered compares to ordered ones. Then definition may look
4515 like:
4516
4517 @smallexample
4518 #define REVERSE_CONDITION(CODE, MODE) \
4519 ((MODE) != CCFPmode ? reverse_condition (CODE) \
4520 : reverse_condition_maybe_unordered (CODE))
4521 @end smallexample
4522 @end defmac
4523
4524 @hook TARGET_FIXED_CONDITION_CODE_REGS
4525
4526 @hook TARGET_CC_MODES_COMPATIBLE
4527
4528 @hook TARGET_FLAGS_REGNUM
4529
4530 @node Costs
4531 @section Describing Relative Costs of Operations
4532 @cindex costs of instructions
4533 @cindex relative costs
4534 @cindex speed of instructions
4535
4536 These macros let you describe the relative speed of various operations
4537 on the target machine.
4538
4539 @defmac REGISTER_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{from}, @var{to})
4540 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} from a
4541 register in class @var{from} to one in class @var{to}. The classes are
4542 expressed using the enumeration values such as @code{GENERAL_REGS}. A
4543 value of 2 is the default; other values are interpreted relative to
4544 that.
4545
4546 It is not required that the cost always equal 2 when @var{from} is the
4547 same as @var{to}; on some machines it is expensive to move between
4548 registers if they are not general registers.
4549
4550 If reload sees an insn consisting of a single @code{set} between two
4551 hard registers, and if @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their
4552 classes returns a value of 2, reload does not check to ensure that the
4553 constraints of the insn are met. Setting a cost of other than 2 will
4554 allow reload to verify that the constraints are met. You should do this
4555 if the @samp{mov@var{m}} pattern's constraints do not allow such copying.
4556
4557 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
4558 @code{TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST} instead.
4559 @end defmac
4560
4561 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST
4562
4563 @defmac MEMORY_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{class}, @var{in})
4564 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} between a
4565 register of class @var{class} and memory; @var{in} is zero if the value
4566 is to be written to memory, nonzero if it is to be read in. This cost
4567 is relative to those in @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST}. If moving between
4568 registers and memory is more expensive than between two registers, you
4569 should define this macro to express the relative cost.
4570
4571 If you do not define this macro, GCC uses a default cost of 4 plus
4572 the cost of copying via a secondary reload register, if one is
4573 needed. If your machine requires a secondary reload register to copy
4574 between memory and a register of @var{class} but the reload mechanism is
4575 more complex than copying via an intermediate, define this macro to
4576 reflect the actual cost of the move.
4577
4578 GCC defines the function @code{memory_move_secondary_cost} if
4579 secondary reloads are needed. It computes the costs due to copying via
4580 a secondary register. If your machine copies from memory using a
4581 secondary register in the conventional way but the default base value of
4582 4 is not correct for your machine, define this macro to add some other
4583 value to the result of that function. The arguments to that function
4584 are the same as to this macro.
4585
4586 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
4587 @code{TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST} instead.
4588 @end defmac
4589
4590 @hook TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST
4591
4592 @defmac BRANCH_COST (@var{speed_p}, @var{predictable_p})
4593 A C expression for the cost of a branch instruction. A value of 1 is
4594 the default; other values are interpreted relative to that. Parameter
4595 @var{speed_p} is true when the branch in question should be optimized
4596 for speed. When it is false, @code{BRANCH_COST} should return a value
4597 optimal for code size rather than performance. @var{predictable_p} is
4598 true for well-predicted branches. On many architectures the
4599 @code{BRANCH_COST} can be reduced then.
4600 @end defmac
4601
4602 Here are additional macros which do not specify precise relative costs,
4603 but only that certain actions are more expensive than GCC would
4604 ordinarily expect.
4605
4606 @defmac SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4607 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if accessing less
4608 than a word of memory (i.e.@: a @code{char} or a @code{short}) is no
4609 faster than accessing a word of memory, i.e., if such access
4610 require more than one instruction or if there is no difference in cost
4611 between byte and (aligned) word loads.
4612
4613 When this macro is not defined, the compiler will access a field by
4614 finding the smallest containing object; when it is defined, a fullword
4615 load will be used if alignment permits. Unless bytes accesses are
4616 faster than word accesses, using word accesses is preferable since it
4617 may eliminate subsequent memory access if subsequent accesses occur to
4618 other fields in the same word of the structure, but to different bytes.
4619 @end defmac
4620
4621 @defmac SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (@var{mode}, @var{alignment})
4622 Define this macro to be the value 1 if memory accesses described by the
4623 @var{mode} and @var{alignment} parameters have a cost many times greater
4624 than aligned accesses, for example if they are emulated in a trap
4625 handler.
4626
4627 When this macro is nonzero, the compiler will act as if
4628 @code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} were nonzero when generating code for block
4629 moves. This can cause significantly more instructions to be produced.
4630 Therefore, do not set this macro nonzero if unaligned accesses only add a
4631 cycle or two to the time for a memory access.
4632
4633 If the value of this macro is always zero, it need not be defined. If
4634 this macro is defined, it should produce a nonzero value when
4635 @code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} is nonzero.
4636 @end defmac
4637
4638 @defmac MOVE_RATIO (@var{speed})
4639 The threshold of number of scalar memory-to-memory move insns, @emph{below}
4640 which a sequence of insns should be generated instead of a
4641 string move insn or a library call. Increasing the value will always
4642 make code faster, but eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4643
4644 Note that on machines where the corresponding move insn is a
4645 @code{define_expand} that emits a sequence of insns, this macro counts
4646 the number of such sequences.
4647
4648 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4649 optimized for speed rather than size.
4650
4651 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4652 @end defmac
4653
4654 @hook TARGET_USE_BY_PIECES_INFRASTRUCTURE_P
4655
4656 @defmac MOVE_MAX_PIECES
4657 A C expression used by @code{move_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4658 a load or store used to copy memory is. Defaults to @code{MOVE_MAX}.
4659 @end defmac
4660
4661 @defmac CLEAR_RATIO (@var{speed})
4662 The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
4663 of insns should be generated to clear memory instead of a string clear insn
4664 or a library call. Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
4665 eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4666
4667 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4668 optimized for speed rather than size.
4669
4670 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4671 @end defmac
4672
4673 @defmac SET_RATIO (@var{speed})
4674 The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
4675 of insns should be generated to set memory to a constant value, instead of
4676 a block set insn or a library call.
4677 Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
4678 eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4679
4680 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4681 optimized for speed rather than size.
4682
4683 If you don't define this, it defaults to the value of @code{MOVE_RATIO}.
4684 @end defmac
4685
4686 @defmac USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4687 A C expression used to determine whether a load postincrement is a good
4688 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4689 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4690 @end defmac
4691
4692 @defmac USE_LOAD_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4693 A C expression used to determine whether a load postdecrement is a good
4694 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4695 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4696 @end defmac
4697
4698 @defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4699 A C expression used to determine whether a load preincrement is a good
4700 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4701 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4702 @end defmac
4703
4704 @defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4705 A C expression used to determine whether a load predecrement is a good
4706 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4707 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4708 @end defmac
4709
4710 @defmac USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4711 A C expression used to determine whether a store postincrement is a good
4712 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4713 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4714 @end defmac
4715
4716 @defmac USE_STORE_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4717 A C expression used to determine whether a store postdecrement is a good
4718 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4719 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4720 @end defmac
4721
4722 @defmac USE_STORE_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4723 This macro is used to determine whether a store preincrement is a good
4724 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4725 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4726 @end defmac
4727
4728 @defmac USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4729 This macro is used to determine whether a store predecrement is a good
4730 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4731 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4732 @end defmac
4733
4734 @defmac NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4735 Define this macro to be true if it is as good or better to call a constant
4736 function address than to call an address kept in a register.
4737 @end defmac
4738
4739 @defmac LOGICAL_OP_NON_SHORT_CIRCUIT
4740 Define this macro if a non-short-circuit operation produced by
4741 @samp{fold_range_test ()} is optimal. This macro defaults to true if
4742 @code{BRANCH_COST} is greater than or equal to the value 2.
4743 @end defmac
4744
4745 @hook TARGET_OPTAB_SUPPORTED_P
4746
4747 @hook TARGET_RTX_COSTS
4748
4749 @hook TARGET_ADDRESS_COST
4750
4751 @hook TARGET_NO_SPECULATION_IN_DELAY_SLOTS_P
4752
4753 @node Scheduling
4754 @section Adjusting the Instruction Scheduler
4755
4756 The instruction scheduler may need a fair amount of machine-specific
4757 adjustment in order to produce good code. GCC provides several target
4758 hooks for this purpose. It is usually enough to define just a few of
4759 them: try the first ones in this list first.
4760
4761 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ISSUE_RATE
4762
4763 @hook TARGET_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE
4764
4765 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST
4766
4767 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_PRIORITY
4768
4769 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REORDER
4770
4771 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REORDER2
4772
4773 @hook TARGET_SCHED_MACRO_FUSION_P
4774
4775 @hook TARGET_SCHED_MACRO_FUSION_PAIR_P
4776
4777 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DEPENDENCIES_EVALUATION_HOOK
4778
4779 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT
4780
4781 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FINISH
4782
4783 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_GLOBAL
4784
4785 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FINISH_GLOBAL
4786
4787 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN
4788
4789 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN
4790
4791 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN
4792
4793 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN
4794
4795 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_ADVANCE_CYCLE
4796
4797 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_ADVANCE_CYCLE
4798
4799 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD
4800
4801 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD_GUARD
4802
4803 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BEGIN
4804
4805 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_ISSUE
4806
4807 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BACKTRACK
4808
4809 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_END
4810
4811 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_INIT
4812
4813 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_FINI
4814
4815 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_NEW_CYCLE
4816
4817 @hook TARGET_SCHED_IS_COSTLY_DEPENDENCE
4818
4819 @hook TARGET_SCHED_H_I_D_EXTENDED
4820
4821 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ALLOC_SCHED_CONTEXT
4822
4823 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_SCHED_CONTEXT
4824
4825 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_CONTEXT
4826
4827 @hook TARGET_SCHED_CLEAR_SCHED_CONTEXT
4828
4829 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FREE_SCHED_CONTEXT
4830
4831 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SPECULATE_INSN
4832
4833 @hook TARGET_SCHED_NEEDS_BLOCK_P
4834
4835 @hook TARGET_SCHED_GEN_SPEC_CHECK
4836
4837 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_FLAGS
4838
4839 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SMS_RES_MII
4840
4841 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH
4842
4843 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH_DO
4844
4845 @hook TARGET_SCHED_EXPOSED_PIPELINE
4846
4847 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REASSOCIATION_WIDTH
4848
4849 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FUSION_PRIORITY
4850
4851 @node Sections
4852 @section Dividing the Output into Sections (Texts, Data, @dots{})
4853 @c the above section title is WAY too long. maybe cut the part between
4854 @c the (...)? --mew 10feb93
4855
4856 An object file is divided into sections containing different types of
4857 data. In the most common case, there are three sections: the @dfn{text
4858 section}, which holds instructions and read-only data; the @dfn{data
4859 section}, which holds initialized writable data; and the @dfn{bss
4860 section}, which holds uninitialized data. Some systems have other kinds
4861 of sections.
4862
4863 @file{varasm.c} provides several well-known sections, such as
4864 @code{text_section}, @code{data_section} and @code{bss_section}.
4865 The normal way of controlling a @code{@var{foo}_section} variable
4866 is to define the associated @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macro,
4867 as described below. The macros are only read once, when @file{varasm.c}
4868 initializes itself, so their values must be run-time constants.
4869 They may however depend on command-line flags.
4870
4871 @emph{Note:} Some run-time files, such @file{crtstuff.c}, also make
4872 use of the @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macros, and expect them
4873 to be string literals.
4874
4875 Some assemblers require a different string to be written every time a
4876 section is selected. If your assembler falls into this category, you
4877 should define the @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS} hook and use
4878 @code{get_unnamed_section} to set up the sections.
4879
4880 You must always create a @code{text_section}, either by defining
4881 @code{TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or by initializing @code{text_section}
4882 in @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS}. The same is true of
4883 @code{data_section} and @code{DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP}. If you do not
4884 create a distinct @code{readonly_data_section}, the default is to
4885 reuse @code{text_section}.
4886
4887 All the other @file{varasm.c} sections are optional, and are null
4888 if the target does not provide them.
4889
4890 @defmac TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4891 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4892 assembler operation that should precede instructions and read-only data.
4893 Normally @code{"\t.text"} is right.
4894 @end defmac
4895
4896 @defmac HOT_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
4897 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing most
4898 frequently executed functions of the program. If not defined, GCC will provide
4899 a default definition if the target supports named sections.
4900 @end defmac
4901
4902 @defmac UNLIKELY_EXECUTED_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
4903 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing unlikely
4904 executed functions in the program.
4905 @end defmac
4906
4907 @defmac DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4908 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4909 assembler operation to identify the following data as writable initialized
4910 data. Normally @code{"\t.data"} is right.
4911 @end defmac
4912
4913 @defmac SDATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4914 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4915 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4916 initialized, writable small data.
4917 @end defmac
4918
4919 @defmac READONLY_DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4920 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4921 assembler operation to identify the following data as read-only initialized
4922 data.
4923 @end defmac
4924
4925 @defmac BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4926 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4927 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4928 uninitialized global data. If not defined, and
4929 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} not defined,
4930 uninitialized global data will be output in the data section if
4931 @option{-fno-common} is passed, otherwise @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} will be
4932 used.
4933 @end defmac
4934
4935 @defmac SBSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4936 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4937 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4938 uninitialized, writable small data.
4939 @end defmac
4940
4941 @defmac TLS_COMMON_ASM_OP
4942 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4943 assembler operation to identify the following data as thread-local
4944 common data. The default is @code{".tls_common"}.
4945 @end defmac
4946
4947 @defmac TLS_SECTION_ASM_FLAG
4948 If defined, a C expression whose value is a character constant
4949 containing the flag used to mark a section as a TLS section. The
4950 default is @code{'T'}.
4951 @end defmac
4952
4953 @defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4954 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4955 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4956 initialization code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
4957 not exist. This section has no corresponding @code{init_section}
4958 variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
4959 @end defmac
4960
4961 @defmac FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP
4962 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4963 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4964 finalization code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
4965 not exist. This section has no corresponding @code{fini_section}
4966 variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
4967 @end defmac
4968
4969 @defmac INIT_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
4970 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4971 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4972 part of the @code{.init_array} (or equivalent) section. If not
4973 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. Do not define
4974 both this macro and @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
4975 @end defmac
4976
4977 @defmac FINI_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
4978 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4979 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4980 part of the @code{.fini_array} (or equivalent) section. If not
4981 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. Do not define
4982 both this macro and @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
4983 @end defmac
4984
4985 @defmac MACH_DEP_SECTION_ASM_FLAG
4986 If defined, a C expression whose value is a character constant
4987 containing the flag used to mark a machine-dependent section. This
4988 corresponds to the @code{SECTION_MACH_DEP} section flag.
4989 @end defmac
4990
4991 @defmac CRT_CALL_STATIC_FUNCTION (@var{section_op}, @var{function})
4992 If defined, an ASM statement that switches to a different section
4993 via @var{section_op}, calls @var{function}, and switches back to
4994 the text section. This is used in @file{crtstuff.c} if
4995 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP} to calls
4996 to initialization and finalization functions from the init and fini
4997 sections. By default, this macro uses a simple function call. Some
4998 ports need hand-crafted assembly code to avoid dependencies on
4999 registers initialized in the function prologue or to ensure that
5000 constant pools don't end up too far way in the text section.
5001 @end defmac
5002
5003 @defmac TARGET_LIBGCC_SDATA_SECTION
5004 If defined, a string which names the section into which small
5005 variables defined in crtstuff and libgcc should go. This is useful
5006 when the target has options for optimizing access to small data, and
5007 you want the crtstuff and libgcc routines to be conservative in what
5008 they expect of your application yet liberal in what your application
5009 expects. For example, for targets with a @code{.sdata} section (like
5010 MIPS), you could compile crtstuff with @code{-G 0} so that it doesn't
5011 require small data support from your application, but use this macro
5012 to put small data into @code{.sdata} so that your application can
5013 access these variables whether it uses small data or not.
5014 @end defmac
5015
5016 @defmac FORCE_CODE_SECTION_ALIGN
5017 If defined, an ASM statement that aligns a code section to some
5018 arbitrary boundary. This is used to force all fragments of the
5019 @code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections to have to same alignment
5020 and thus prevent the linker from having to add any padding.
5021 @end defmac
5022
5023 @defmac JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
5024 Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if jump
5025 tables (for @code{tablejump} insns) should be output in the text
5026 section, along with the assembler instructions. Otherwise, the
5027 readonly data section is used.
5028
5029 This macro is irrelevant if there is no separate readonly data section.
5030 @end defmac
5031
5032 @hook TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS
5033
5034 @hook TARGET_ASM_RELOC_RW_MASK
5035
5036 @hook TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION
5037
5038 @defmac USE_SELECT_SECTION_FOR_FUNCTIONS
5039 Define this macro if you wish TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION to be called
5040 for @code{FUNCTION_DECL}s as well as for variables and constants.
5041
5042 In the case of a @code{FUNCTION_DECL}, @var{reloc} will be zero if the
5043 function has been determined to be likely to be called, and nonzero if
5044 it is unlikely to be called.
5045 @end defmac
5046
5047 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNIQUE_SECTION
5048
5049 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_RODATA_SECTION
5050
5051 @hook TARGET_ASM_MERGEABLE_RODATA_PREFIX
5052
5053 @hook TARGET_ASM_TM_CLONE_TABLE_SECTION
5054
5055 @hook TARGET_ASM_SELECT_RTX_SECTION
5056
5057 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_DECL_ASSEMBLER_NAME
5058
5059 @hook TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO
5060
5061 @hook TARGET_STRIP_NAME_ENCODING
5062
5063 @hook TARGET_IN_SMALL_DATA_P
5064
5065 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SRODATA_SECTION
5066
5067 @hook TARGET_PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
5068
5069 @hook TARGET_BINDS_LOCAL_P
5070
5071 @hook TARGET_HAVE_TLS
5072
5073
5074 @node PIC
5075 @section Position Independent Code
5076 @cindex position independent code
5077 @cindex PIC
5078
5079 This section describes macros that help implement generation of position
5080 independent code. Simply defining these macros is not enough to
5081 generate valid PIC; you must also add support to the hook
5082 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} and to the macro
5083 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}, as well as @code{LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS}. You
5084 must modify the definition of @samp{movsi} to do something appropriate
5085 when the source operand contains a symbolic address. You may also
5086 need to alter the handling of switch statements so that they use
5087 relative addresses.
5088 @c i rearranged the order of the macros above to try to force one of
5089 @c them to the next line, to eliminate an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
5090
5091 @defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
5092 The register number of the register used to address a table of static
5093 data addresses in memory. In some cases this register is defined by a
5094 processor's ``application binary interface'' (ABI)@. When this macro
5095 is defined, RTL is generated for this register once, as with the stack
5096 pointer and frame pointer registers. If this macro is not defined, it
5097 is up to the machine-dependent files to allocate such a register (if
5098 necessary). Note that this register must be fixed when in use (e.g.@:
5099 when @code{flag_pic} is true).
5100 @end defmac
5101
5102 @defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
5103 A C expression that is nonzero if the register defined by
5104 @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is clobbered by calls. If not defined,
5105 the default is zero. Do not define
5106 this macro if @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is not defined.
5107 @end defmac
5108
5109 @defmac LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P (@var{x})
5110 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate immediate
5111 operand on the target machine when generating position independent code.
5112 You can assume that @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not
5113 check this. You can also assume @var{flag_pic} is true, so you need not
5114 check it either. You need not define this macro if all constants
5115 (including @code{SYMBOL_REF}) can be immediate operands when generating
5116 position independent code.
5117 @end defmac
5118
5119 @node Assembler Format
5120 @section Defining the Output Assembler Language
5121
5122 This section describes macros whose principal purpose is to describe how
5123 to write instructions in assembler language---rather than what the
5124 instructions do.
5125
5126 @menu
5127 * File Framework:: Structural information for the assembler file.
5128 * Data Output:: Output of constants (numbers, strings, addresses).
5129 * Uninitialized Data:: Output of uninitialized variables.
5130 * Label Output:: Output and generation of labels.
5131 * Initialization:: General principles of initialization
5132 and termination routines.
5133 * Macros for Initialization::
5134 Specific macros that control the handling of
5135 initialization and termination routines.
5136 * Instruction Output:: Output of actual instructions.
5137 * Dispatch Tables:: Output of jump tables.
5138 * Exception Region Output:: Output of exception region code.
5139 * Alignment Output:: Pseudo ops for alignment and skipping data.
5140 @end menu
5141
5142 @node File Framework
5143 @subsection The Overall Framework of an Assembler File
5144 @cindex assembler format
5145 @cindex output of assembler code
5146
5147 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5148 This describes the overall framework of an assembly file.
5149
5150 @findex default_file_start
5151 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START
5152
5153 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_APP_OFF
5154
5155 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_FILE_DIRECTIVE
5156
5157 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_END
5158
5159 @deftypefun void file_end_indicate_exec_stack ()
5160 Some systems use a common convention, the @samp{.note.GNU-stack}
5161 special section, to indicate whether or not an object file relies on
5162 the stack being executable. If your system uses this convention, you
5163 should define @code{TARGET_ASM_FILE_END} to this function. If you
5164 need to do other things in that hook, have your hook function call
5165 this function.
5166 @end deftypefun
5167
5168 @hook TARGET_ASM_LTO_START
5169
5170 @hook TARGET_ASM_LTO_END
5171
5172 @hook TARGET_ASM_CODE_END
5173
5174 @defmac ASM_COMMENT_START
5175 A C string constant describing how to begin a comment in the target
5176 assembler language. The compiler assumes that the comment will end at
5177 the end of the line.
5178 @end defmac
5179
5180 @defmac ASM_APP_ON
5181 A C string constant for text to be output before each @code{asm}
5182 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5183 @code{"#APP"}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
5184 assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it must check the lines
5185 that follow for all valid assembler constructs.
5186 @end defmac
5187
5188 @defmac ASM_APP_OFF
5189 A C string constant for text to be output after each @code{asm}
5190 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5191 @code{"#NO_APP"}, which tells the GNU assembler to resume making the
5192 time-saving assumptions that are valid for ordinary compiler output.
5193 @end defmac
5194
5195 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5196 A C statement to output COFF information or DWARF debugging information
5197 which indicates that filename @var{name} is the current source file to
5198 the stdio stream @var{stream}.
5199
5200 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
5201 for the file format in use is appropriate.
5202 @end defmac
5203
5204 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
5205
5206 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT
5207
5208 @defmac OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING (@var{stream}, @var{string})
5209 A C statement to output the string @var{string} to the stdio stream
5210 @var{stream}. If you do not call the function @code{output_quoted_string}
5211 in your config files, GCC will only call it to output filenames to
5212 the assembler source. So you can use it to canonicalize the format
5213 of the filename using this macro.
5214 @end defmac
5215
5216 @hook TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION
5217
5218 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SECTION
5219
5220 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SWITCHED_TEXT_SECTIONS
5221
5222 @hook TARGET_HAVE_NAMED_SECTIONS
5223 This flag is true if the target supports @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION}.
5224 It must not be modified by command-line option processing.
5225 @end deftypevr
5226
5227 @anchor{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}
5228 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS
5229
5230 @hook TARGET_SECTION_TYPE_FLAGS
5231
5232 @hook TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES
5233
5234 @hook TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES_SECTION
5235
5236 @need 2000
5237 @node Data Output
5238 @subsection Output of Data
5239
5240
5241 @hook TARGET_ASM_BYTE_OP
5242
5243 @hook TARGET_ASM_INTEGER
5244
5245 @hook TARGET_ASM_DECL_END
5246
5247 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_CONST_EXTRA
5248
5249 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII (@var{stream}, @var{ptr}, @var{len})
5250 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5251 instruction to assemble a string constant containing the @var{len}
5252 bytes at @var{ptr}. @var{ptr} will be a C expression of type
5253 @code{char *} and @var{len} a C expression of type @code{int}.
5254
5255 If the assembler has a @code{.ascii} pseudo-op as found in the
5256 Berkeley Unix assembler, do not define the macro
5257 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII}.
5258 @end defmac
5259
5260 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FDESC (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{n})
5261 A C statement to output word @var{n} of a function descriptor for
5262 @var{decl}. This must be defined if @code{TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS}
5263 is defined, and is otherwise unused.
5264 @end defmac
5265
5266 @defmac CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5267 You may define this macro as a C expression. You should define the
5268 expression to have a nonzero value if GCC should output the constant
5269 pool for a function before the code for the function, or a zero value if
5270 GCC should output the constant pool after the function. If you do
5271 not define this macro, the usual case, GCC will output the constant
5272 pool before the function.
5273 @end defmac
5274
5275 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE (@var{file}, @var{funname}, @var{fundecl}, @var{size})
5276 A C statement to output assembler commands to define the start of the
5277 constant pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving
5278 the name of the function. Should the return type of the function
5279 be required, it can be obtained via @var{fundecl}. @var{size}
5280 is the size, in bytes, of the constant pool that will be written
5281 immediately after this call.
5282
5283 If no constant-pool prefix is required, the usual case, this macro need
5284 not be defined.
5285 @end defmac
5286
5287 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY (@var{file}, @var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{align}, @var{labelno}, @var{jumpto})
5288 A C statement (with or without semicolon) to output a constant in the
5289 constant pool, if it needs special treatment. (This macro need not do
5290 anything for RTL expressions that can be output normally.)
5291
5292 The argument @var{file} is the standard I/O stream to output the
5293 assembler code on. @var{x} is the RTL expression for the constant to
5294 output, and @var{mode} is the machine mode (in case @var{x} is a
5295 @samp{const_int}). @var{align} is the required alignment for the value
5296 @var{x}; you should output an assembler directive to force this much
5297 alignment.
5298
5299 The argument @var{labelno} is a number to use in an internal label for
5300 the address of this pool entry. The definition of this macro is
5301 responsible for outputting the label definition at the proper place.
5302 Here is how to do this:
5303
5304 @smallexample
5305 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} (@var{file}, "LC", @var{labelno});
5306 @end smallexample
5307
5308 When you output a pool entry specially, you should end with a
5309 @code{goto} to the label @var{jumpto}. This will prevent the same pool
5310 entry from being output a second time in the usual manner.
5311
5312 You need not define this macro if it would do nothing.
5313 @end defmac
5314
5315 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
5316 A C statement to output assembler commands to at the end of the constant
5317 pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving the name of the
5318 function. Should the return type of the function be required, you can
5319 obtain it via @var{fundecl}. @var{size} is the size, in bytes, of the
5320 constant pool that GCC wrote immediately before this call.
5321
5322 If no constant-pool epilogue is required, the usual case, you need not
5323 define this macro.
5324 @end defmac
5325
5326 @defmac IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR (@var{C}, @var{STR})
5327 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if @var{C} is
5328 used as a logical line separator by the assembler. @var{STR} points
5329 to the position in the string where @var{C} was found; this can be used if
5330 a line separator uses multiple characters.
5331
5332 If you do not define this macro, the default is that only
5333 the character @samp{;} is treated as a logical line separator.
5334 @end defmac
5335
5336 @hook TARGET_ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5337
5338 These macros are provided by @file{real.h} for writing the definitions
5339 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE} and the like:
5340
5341 @defmac REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5342 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5343 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5344 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5345 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL64 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5346 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL128 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5347 These translate @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to the
5348 target's floating point representation, and store its bit pattern in
5349 the variable @var{l}. For @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE} and
5350 @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32}, this variable should be a
5351 simple @code{long int}. For the others, it should be an array of
5352 @code{long int}. The number of elements in this array is determined
5353 by the size of the desired target floating point data type: 32 bits of
5354 it go in each @code{long int} array element. Each array element holds
5355 32 bits of the result, even if @code{long int} is wider than 32 bits
5356 on the host machine.
5357
5358 The array element values are designed so that you can print them out
5359 using @code{fprintf} in the order they should appear in the target
5360 machine's memory.
5361 @end defmac
5362
5363 @node Uninitialized Data
5364 @subsection Output of Uninitialized Variables
5365
5366 Each of the macros in this section is used to do the whole job of
5367 outputting a single uninitialized variable.
5368
5369 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5370 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5371 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a common-label named
5372 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5373 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants. It is
5374 possible that @var{size} may be zero, for instance if a struct with no
5375 other member than a zero-length array is defined. In this case, the
5376 backend must output a symbol definition that allocates at least one
5377 byte, both so that the address of the resulting object does not compare
5378 equal to any other, and because some object formats cannot even express
5379 the concept of a zero-sized common symbol, as that is how they represent
5380 an ordinary undefined external.
5381
5382 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5383 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5384 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5385
5386 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5387 common global variables are output.
5388 @end defmac
5389
5390 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5391 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} except takes the required alignment as a
5392 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5393 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, and gives you more flexibility in
5394 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5395 as the number of bits.
5396 @end defmac
5397
5398 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5399 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} except that @var{decl} of the
5400 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5401 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5402 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} and
5403 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON}. Define this macro when you need to see
5404 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5405 @end defmac
5406
5407 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5408 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5409 @var{stream} the assembler definition of uninitialized global @var{decl} named
5410 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{alignment}
5411 is the alignment specified as the number of bits.
5412
5413 Try to use function @code{asm_output_aligned_bss} defined in file
5414 @file{varasm.c} when defining this macro. If unable, use the expression
5415 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name itself;
5416 before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax for defining
5417 the name, and a newline.
5418
5419 There are two ways of handling global BSS@. One is to define this macro.
5420 The other is to have @code{TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION} return a
5421 switchable BSS section (@pxref{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}).
5422 You do not need to do both.
5423
5424 Some languages do not have @code{common} data, and require a
5425 non-common form of global BSS in order to handle uninitialized globals
5426 efficiently. C++ is one example of this. However, if the target does
5427 not support global BSS, the front end may choose to make globals
5428 common in order to save space in the object file.
5429 @end defmac
5430
5431 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5432 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5433 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a local-common-label named
5434 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5435 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5436
5437 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5438 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5439 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5440
5441 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5442 static variables are output.
5443 @end defmac
5444
5445 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5446 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL} except takes the required alignment as a
5447 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5448 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, and gives you more flexibility in
5449 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5450 as the number of bits.
5451 @end defmac
5452
5453 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5454 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL} except that @var{decl} of the
5455 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5456 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5457 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DECL} and
5458 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL}. Define this macro when you need to see
5459 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5460 @end defmac
5461
5462 @node Label Output
5463 @subsection Output and Generation of Labels
5464
5465 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5466 This is about outputting labels.
5467
5468 @findex assemble_name
5469 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5470 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5471 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name}.
5472 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5473 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5474 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline. A default
5475 definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
5476 @end defmac
5477
5478 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5479 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5480 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name} of
5481 a function.
5482 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5483 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5484 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline. A default
5485 definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
5486
5487 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5488 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5489 @end defmac
5490
5491 @findex assemble_name_raw
5492 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5493 Identical to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}, except that @var{name} is known
5494 to refer to a compiler-generated label. The default definition uses
5495 @code{assemble_name_raw}, which is like @code{assemble_name} except
5496 that it is more efficient.
5497 @end defmac
5498
5499 @defmac SIZE_ASM_OP
5500 A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
5501 size of a symbol, without any arguments. On systems that use ELF, the
5502 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.size\t"}; on other
5503 systems, the default is not to define this macro.
5504
5505 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definitions
5506 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE}
5507 for your system. If you need your own custom definitions of those
5508 macros, or if you do not need explicit symbol sizes at all, do not
5509 define this macro.
5510 @end defmac
5511
5512 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size})
5513 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5514 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the size of the
5515 symbol @var{name} is @var{size}. @var{size} is a @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}.
5516 If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
5517 provided.
5518 @end defmac
5519
5520 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5521 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5522 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler to calculate the size of
5523 the symbol @var{name} by subtracting its address from the current
5524 address.
5525
5526 If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
5527 provided. The default assumes that the assembler recognizes a special
5528 @samp{.} symbol as referring to the current address, and can calculate
5529 the difference between this and another symbol. If your assembler does
5530 not recognize @samp{.} or cannot do calculations with it, you will need
5531 to redefine @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} to use some other technique.
5532 @end defmac
5533
5534 @defmac NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
5535 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
5536 @samp{$} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in
5537 G++ have @samp{$} in the identifiers. If this macro is defined,
5538 @samp{.} is used instead.
5539 @end defmac
5540
5541 @defmac NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
5542 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
5543 @samp{.} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in G++
5544 have names that use @samp{.}. If this macro is defined, these names
5545 are rewritten to avoid @samp{.}.
5546 @end defmac
5547
5548 @defmac TYPE_ASM_OP
5549 A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
5550 type of a symbol, without any arguments. On systems that use ELF, the
5551 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.type\t"}; on other
5552 systems, the default is not to define this macro.
5553
5554 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
5555 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system. If you need your own
5556 custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
5557 types at all, do not define this macro.
5558 @end defmac
5559
5560 @defmac TYPE_OPERAND_FMT
5561 A C string which specifies (using @code{printf} syntax) the format of
5562 the second operand to @code{TYPE_ASM_OP}. On systems that use ELF, the
5563 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"@@%s"}; on other systems,
5564 the default is not to define this macro.
5565
5566 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
5567 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system. If you need your own
5568 custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
5569 types at all, do not define this macro.
5570 @end defmac
5571
5572 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{type})
5573 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5574 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the type of the
5575 symbol @var{name} is @var{type}. @var{type} is a C string; currently,
5576 that string is always either @samp{"function"} or @samp{"object"}, but
5577 you should not count on this.
5578
5579 If you define @code{TYPE_ASM_OP} and @code{TYPE_OPERAND_FMT}, a default
5580 definition of this macro is provided.
5581 @end defmac
5582
5583 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5584 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5585 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5586 function which is being defined. This macro is responsible for
5587 outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5588 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5589 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5590
5591 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5592 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}).
5593
5594 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition
5595 of this macro.
5596 @end defmac
5597
5598 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5599 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5600 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a function
5601 which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5602 function. The argument @var{decl} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node
5603 representing the function.
5604
5605 If this macro is not defined, then the function size is not defined.
5606
5607 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition
5608 of this macro.
5609 @end defmac
5610
5611 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_COLD_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5612 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5613 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5614 cold function partition which is being defined. This macro is responsible
5615 for outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5616 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5617 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5618
5619 If this macro is not defined, then the cold partition name is defined in the
5620 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5621
5622 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition
5623 of this macro.
5624 @end defmac
5625
5626 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_COLD_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5627 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5628 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a cold function
5629 partition which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5630 cold partition of the function. The argument @var{decl} is the
5631 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5632
5633 If this macro is not defined, then the partition size is not defined.
5634
5635 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition
5636 of this macro.
5637 @end defmac
5638
5639 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5640 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5641 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of an
5642 initialized variable which is being defined. This macro must output the
5643 label definition (perhaps using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument
5644 @var{decl} is the @code{VAR_DECL} tree node representing the variable.
5645
5646 If this macro is not defined, then the variable name is defined in the
5647 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5648
5649 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
5650 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition of this macro.
5651 @end defmac
5652
5653 @hook TARGET_ASM_DECLARE_CONSTANT_NAME
5654
5655 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_REGISTER_GLOBAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{regno}, @var{name})
5656 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5657 @var{stream} any text necessary for claiming a register @var{regno}
5658 for a global variable @var{decl} with name @var{name}.
5659
5660 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5661 nothing.
5662 @end defmac
5663
5664 @defmac ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{toplevel}, @var{atend})
5665 A C statement (sans semicolon) to finish up declaring a variable name
5666 once the compiler has processed its initializer fully and thus has had a
5667 chance to determine the size of an array when controlled by an
5668 initializer. This is used on systems where it's necessary to declare
5669 something about the size of the object.
5670
5671 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5672 nothing.
5673
5674 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
5675 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition of this macro.
5676 @end defmac
5677
5678 @hook TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL
5679
5680 @hook TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_DECL_NAME
5681
5682 @hook TARGET_ASM_ASSEMBLE_UNDEFINED_DECL
5683
5684 @defmac ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5685 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5686 @var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} weak;
5687 that is, available for reference from other files but only used if
5688 no other definition is available. Use the expression
5689 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5690 itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5691 for making that name weak, and a newline.
5692
5693 If you don't define this macro or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}, GCC will not
5694 support weak symbols and you should not define the @code{SUPPORTS_WEAK}
5695 macro.
5696 @end defmac
5697
5698 @defmac ASM_WEAKEN_DECL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5699 Combines (and replaces) the function of @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} and
5700 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS}, allowing access to the associated function
5701 or variable decl. If @var{value} is not @code{NULL}, this C statement
5702 should output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code which
5703 defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5704 @var{value}. If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it should output commands
5705 to make @var{name} weak.
5706 @end defmac
5707
5708 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAKREF (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5709 Outputs a directive that enables @var{name} to be used to refer to
5710 symbol @var{value} with weak-symbol semantics. @code{decl} is the
5711 declaration of @code{name}.
5712 @end defmac
5713
5714 @defmac SUPPORTS_WEAK
5715 A preprocessor constant expression which evaluates to true if the target
5716 supports weak symbols.
5717
5718 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5719 definition. If either @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}
5720 is defined, the default definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}.
5721 @end defmac
5722
5723 @defmac TARGET_SUPPORTS_WEAK
5724 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports weak symbols.
5725
5726 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5727 definition. The default definition is @samp{(SUPPORTS_WEAK)}. Define
5728 this macro if you want to control weak symbol support with a compiler
5729 flag such as @option{-melf}.
5730 @end defmac
5731
5732 @defmac MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY (@var{decl})
5733 A C statement (sans semicolon) to mark @var{decl} to be emitted as a
5734 public symbol such that extra copies in multiple translation units will
5735 be discarded by the linker. Define this macro if your object file
5736 format provides support for this concept, such as the @samp{COMDAT}
5737 section flags in the Microsoft Windows PE/COFF format, and this support
5738 requires changes to @var{decl}, such as putting it in a separate section.
5739 @end defmac
5740
5741 @defmac SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
5742 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports one-only
5743 semantics.
5744
5745 If you don't define this macro, @file{varasm.c} provides a default
5746 definition. If @code{MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY} is defined, the default
5747 definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
5748 you want to control one-only symbol support with a compiler flag, or if
5749 setting the @code{DECL_ONE_ONLY} flag is enough to mark a declaration to
5750 be emitted as one-only.
5751 @end defmac
5752
5753 @hook TARGET_ASM_ASSEMBLE_VISIBILITY
5754
5755 @defmac TARGET_WEAK_NOT_IN_ARCHIVE_TOC
5756 A C expression that evaluates to true if the target's linker expects
5757 that weak symbols do not appear in a static archive's table of contents.
5758 The default is @code{0}.
5759
5760 Leaving weak symbols out of an archive's table of contents means that,
5761 if a symbol will only have a definition in one translation unit and
5762 will have undefined references from other translation units, that
5763 symbol should not be weak. Defining this macro to be nonzero will
5764 thus have the effect that certain symbols that would normally be weak
5765 (explicit template instantiations, and vtables for polymorphic classes
5766 with noninline key methods) will instead be nonweak.
5767
5768 The C++ ABI requires this macro to be zero. Define this macro for
5769 targets where full C++ ABI compliance is impossible and where linker
5770 restrictions require weak symbols to be left out of a static archive's
5771 table of contents.
5772 @end defmac
5773
5774 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name})
5775 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5776 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name of an external
5777 symbol named @var{name} which is referenced in this compilation but
5778 not defined. The value of @var{decl} is the tree node for the
5779 declaration.
5780
5781 This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5782 The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5783 @end defmac
5784
5785 @hook TARGET_ASM_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL
5786
5787 @hook TARGET_ASM_MARK_DECL_PRESERVED
5788
5789 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5790 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5791 @var{stream} a reference in assembler syntax to a label named
5792 @var{name}. This should add @samp{_} to the front of the name, if that
5793 is customary on your operating system, as it is in most Berkeley Unix
5794 systems. This macro is used in @code{assemble_name}.
5795 @end defmac
5796
5797 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_ASSEMBLER_NAME
5798
5799 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SYMBOL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{sym})
5800 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to
5801 @code{SYMBOL_REF} @var{sym}. If not defined, @code{assemble_name}
5802 will be used to output the name of the symbol. This macro may be used
5803 to modify the way a symbol is referenced depending on information
5804 encoded by @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO}.
5805 @end defmac
5806
5807 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{buf})
5808 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to @var{buf}, the
5809 result of @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL}. If not defined,
5810 @code{assemble_name} will be used to output the name of the symbol.
5811 This macro is not used by @code{output_asm_label}, or the @code{%l}
5812 specifier that calls it; the intention is that this macro should be set
5813 when it is necessary to output a label differently when its address is
5814 being taken.
5815 @end defmac
5816
5817 @hook TARGET_ASM_INTERNAL_LABEL
5818
5819 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEBUG_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5820 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} a debug info
5821 label whose name is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number
5822 @var{num}. This is useful for VLIW targets, where debug info labels
5823 may need to be treated differently than branch target labels. On some
5824 systems, branch target labels must be at the beginning of instruction
5825 bundles, but debug info labels can occur in the middle of instruction
5826 bundles.
5827
5828 If this macro is not defined, then @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} will be
5829 used.
5830 @end defmac
5831
5832 @defmac ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{string}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5833 A C statement to store into the string @var{string} a label whose name
5834 is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5835
5836 This string, when output subsequently by @code{assemble_name}, should
5837 produce the output that @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} would produce
5838 with the same @var{prefix} and @var{num}.
5839
5840 If the string begins with @samp{*}, then @code{assemble_name} will
5841 output the rest of the string unchanged. It is often convenient for
5842 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} to use @samp{*} in this way. If the
5843 string doesn't start with @samp{*}, then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} gets
5844 to output the string, and may change it. (Of course,
5845 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} is also part of your machine description, so
5846 you should know what it does on your machine.)
5847 @end defmac
5848
5849 @defmac ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME (@var{outvar}, @var{name}, @var{number})
5850 A C expression to assign to @var{outvar} (which is a variable of type
5851 @code{char *}) a newly allocated string made from the string
5852 @var{name} and the number @var{number}, with some suitable punctuation
5853 added. Use @code{alloca} to get space for the string.
5854
5855 The string will be used as an argument to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to
5856 produce an assembler label for an internal static variable whose name is
5857 @var{name}. Therefore, the string must be such as to result in valid
5858 assembler code. The argument @var{number} is different each time this
5859 macro is executed; it prevents conflicts between similarly-named
5860 internal static variables in different scopes.
5861
5862 Ideally this string should not be a valid C identifier, to prevent any
5863 conflict with the user's own symbols. Most assemblers allow periods
5864 or percent signs in assembler symbols; putting at least one of these
5865 between the name and the number will suffice.
5866
5867 If this macro is not defined, a default definition will be provided
5868 which is correct for most systems.
5869 @end defmac
5870
5871 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5872 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5873 which defines (equates) the symbol @var{name} to have the value @var{value}.
5874
5875 @findex SET_ASM_OP
5876 If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5877 correct for most systems.
5878 @end defmac
5879
5880 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS (@var{stream}, @var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5881 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5882 which defines (equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name}
5883 to have the value of the tree node @var{decl_of_value}. This macro will
5884 be used in preference to @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} if it is defined and if
5885 the tree nodes are available.
5886
5887 @findex SET_ASM_OP
5888 If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5889 correct for most systems.
5890 @end defmac
5891
5892 @defmac TARGET_DEFERRED_OUTPUT_DEFS (@var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5893 A C statement that evaluates to true if the assembler code which defines
5894 (equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name} to have the value
5895 of the tree node @var{decl_of_value} should be emitted near the end of the
5896 current compilation unit. The default is to not defer output of defines.
5897 This macro affects defines output by @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} and
5898 @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS}.
5899 @end defmac
5900
5901 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5902 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5903 which defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5904 @var{value}. If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it defines @var{name} as
5905 an undefined weak symbol.
5906
5907 Define this macro if the target only supports weak aliases; define
5908 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} instead if possible.
5909 @end defmac
5910
5911 @defmac OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL (@var{buf}, @var{is_inst}, @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name}, @var{sel_name})
5912 Define this macro to override the default assembler names used for
5913 Objective-C methods.
5914
5915 The default name is a unique method number followed by the name of the
5916 class (e.g.@: @samp{_1_Foo}). For methods in categories, the name of
5917 the category is also included in the assembler name (e.g.@:
5918 @samp{_1_Foo_Bar}).
5919
5920 These names are safe on most systems, but make debugging difficult since
5921 the method's selector is not present in the name. Therefore, particular
5922 systems define other ways of computing names.
5923
5924 @var{buf} is an expression of type @code{char *} which gives you a
5925 buffer in which to store the name; its length is as long as
5926 @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name} and @var{sel_name} put together, plus
5927 50 characters extra.
5928
5929 The argument @var{is_inst} specifies whether the method is an instance
5930 method or a class method; @var{class_name} is the name of the class;
5931 @var{cat_name} is the name of the category (or @code{NULL} if the method is not
5932 in a category); and @var{sel_name} is the name of the selector.
5933
5934 On systems where the assembler can handle quoted names, you can use this
5935 macro to provide more human-readable names.
5936 @end defmac
5937
5938 @node Initialization
5939 @subsection How Initialization Functions Are Handled
5940 @cindex initialization routines
5941 @cindex termination routines
5942 @cindex constructors, output of
5943 @cindex destructors, output of
5944
5945 The compiled code for certain languages includes @dfn{constructors}
5946 (also called @dfn{initialization routines})---functions to initialize
5947 data in the program when the program is started. These functions need
5948 to be called before the program is ``started''---that is to say, before
5949 @code{main} is called.
5950
5951 Compiling some languages generates @dfn{destructors} (also called
5952 @dfn{termination routines}) that should be called when the program
5953 terminates.
5954
5955 To make the initialization and termination functions work, the compiler
5956 must output something in the assembler code to cause those functions to
5957 be called at the appropriate time. When you port the compiler to a new
5958 system, you need to specify how to do this.
5959
5960 There are two major ways that GCC currently supports the execution of
5961 initialization and termination functions. Each way has two variants.
5962 Much of the structure is common to all four variations.
5963
5964 @findex __CTOR_LIST__
5965 @findex __DTOR_LIST__
5966 The linker must build two lists of these functions---a list of
5967 initialization functions, called @code{__CTOR_LIST__}, and a list of
5968 termination functions, called @code{__DTOR_LIST__}.
5969
5970 Each list always begins with an ignored function pointer (which may hold
5971 0, @minus{}1, or a count of the function pointers after it, depending on
5972 the environment). This is followed by a series of zero or more function
5973 pointers to constructors (or destructors), followed by a function
5974 pointer containing zero.
5975
5976 Depending on the operating system and its executable file format, either
5977 @file{crtstuff.c} or @file{libgcc2.c} traverses these lists at startup
5978 time and exit time. Constructors are called in reverse order of the
5979 list; destructors in forward order.
5980
5981 The best way to handle static constructors works only for object file
5982 formats which provide arbitrarily-named sections. A section is set
5983 aside for a list of constructors, and another for a list of destructors.
5984 Traditionally these are called @samp{.ctors} and @samp{.dtors}. Each
5985 object file that defines an initialization function also puts a word in
5986 the constructor section to point to that function. The linker
5987 accumulates all these words into one contiguous @samp{.ctors} section.
5988 Termination functions are handled similarly.
5989
5990 This method will be chosen as the default by @file{target-def.h} if
5991 @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION} is defined. A target that does not
5992 support arbitrary sections, but does support special designated
5993 constructor and destructor sections may define @code{CTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP}
5994 and @code{DTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP} to achieve the same effect.
5995
5996 When arbitrary sections are available, there are two variants, depending
5997 upon how the code in @file{crtstuff.c} is called. On systems that
5998 support a @dfn{.init} section which is executed at program startup,
5999 parts of @file{crtstuff.c} are compiled into that section. The
6000 program is linked by the @command{gcc} driver like this:
6001
6002 @smallexample
6003 ld -o @var{output_file} crti.o crtbegin.o @dots{} -lgcc crtend.o crtn.o
6004 @end smallexample
6005
6006 The prologue of a function (@code{__init}) appears in the @code{.init}
6007 section of @file{crti.o}; the epilogue appears in @file{crtn.o}. Likewise
6008 for the function @code{__fini} in the @dfn{.fini} section. Normally these
6009 files are provided by the operating system or by the GNU C library, but
6010 are provided by GCC for a few targets.
6011
6012 The objects @file{crtbegin.o} and @file{crtend.o} are (for most targets)
6013 compiled from @file{crtstuff.c}. They contain, among other things, code
6014 fragments within the @code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections that branch
6015 to routines in the @code{.text} section. The linker will pull all parts
6016 of a section together, which results in a complete @code{__init} function
6017 that invokes the routines we need at startup.
6018
6019 To use this variant, you must define the @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}
6020 macro properly.
6021
6022 If no init section is available, when GCC compiles any function called
6023 @code{main} (or more accurately, any function designated as a program
6024 entry point by the language front end calling @code{expand_main_function}),
6025 it inserts a procedure call to @code{__main} as the first executable code
6026 after the function prologue. The @code{__main} function is defined
6027 in @file{libgcc2.c} and runs the global constructors.
6028
6029 In file formats that don't support arbitrary sections, there are again
6030 two variants. In the simplest variant, the GNU linker (GNU @code{ld})
6031 and an `a.out' format must be used. In this case,
6032 @code{TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR} is defined to produce a @code{.stabs}
6033 entry of type @samp{N_SETT}, referencing the name @code{__CTOR_LIST__},
6034 and with the address of the void function containing the initialization
6035 code as its value. The GNU linker recognizes this as a request to add
6036 the value to a @dfn{set}; the values are accumulated, and are eventually
6037 placed in the executable as a vector in the format described above, with
6038 a leading (ignored) count and a trailing zero element.
6039 @code{TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR} is handled similarly. Since no init
6040 section is available, the absence of @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} causes
6041 the compilation of @code{main} to call @code{__main} as above, starting
6042 the initialization process.
6043
6044 The last variant uses neither arbitrary sections nor the GNU linker.
6045 This is preferable when you want to do dynamic linking and when using
6046 file formats which the GNU linker does not support, such as `ECOFF'@. In
6047 this case, @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is false, initialization and
6048 termination functions are recognized simply by their names. This requires
6049 an extra program in the linkage step, called @command{collect2}. This program
6050 pretends to be the linker, for use with GCC; it does its job by running
6051 the ordinary linker, but also arranges to include the vectors of
6052 initialization and termination functions. These functions are called
6053 via @code{__main} as described above. In order to use this method,
6054 @code{use_collect2} must be defined in the target in @file{config.gcc}.
6055
6056 @ifinfo
6057 The following section describes the specific macros that control and
6058 customize the handling of initialization and termination functions.
6059 @end ifinfo
6060
6061 @node Macros for Initialization
6062 @subsection Macros Controlling Initialization Routines
6063
6064 Here are the macros that control how the compiler handles initialization
6065 and termination functions:
6066
6067 @defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
6068 If defined, a C string constant, including spacing, for the assembler
6069 operation to identify the following data as initialization code. If not
6070 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. When you are
6071 using special sections for initialization and termination functions, this
6072 macro also controls how @file{crtstuff.c} and @file{libgcc2.c} arrange to
6073 run the initialization functions.
6074 @end defmac
6075
6076 @defmac HAS_INIT_SECTION
6077 If defined, @code{main} will not call @code{__main} as described above.
6078 This macro should be defined for systems that control start-up code
6079 on a symbol-by-symbol basis, such as OSF/1, and should not
6080 be defined explicitly for systems that support @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
6081 @end defmac
6082
6083 @defmac LD_INIT_SWITCH
6084 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6085 the following symbol is an initialization routine.
6086 @end defmac
6087
6088 @defmac LD_FINI_SWITCH
6089 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6090 the following symbol is a finalization routine.
6091 @end defmac
6092
6093 @defmac COLLECT_SHARED_INIT_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
6094 If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
6095 automatically called when a shared library is loaded. The function
6096 should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments. If not defined, and
6097 the object format requires an explicit initialization function, then a
6098 function called @code{_GLOBAL__DI} will be generated.
6099
6100 This function and the following one are used by collect2 when linking a
6101 shared library that needs constructors or destructors, or has DWARF2
6102 exception tables embedded in the code.
6103 @end defmac
6104
6105 @defmac COLLECT_SHARED_FINI_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
6106 If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
6107 automatically called when a shared library is unloaded. The function
6108 should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments. If not defined, and
6109 the object format requires an explicit finalization function, then a
6110 function called @code{_GLOBAL__DD} will be generated.
6111 @end defmac
6112
6113 @defmac INVOKE__main
6114 If defined, @code{main} will call @code{__main} despite the presence of
6115 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. This macro should be defined for systems
6116 where the init section is not actually run automatically, but is still
6117 useful for collecting the lists of constructors and destructors.
6118 @end defmac
6119
6120 @defmac SUPPORTS_INIT_PRIORITY
6121 If nonzero, the C++ @code{init_priority} attribute is supported and the
6122 compiler should emit instructions to control the order of initialization
6123 of objects. If zero, the compiler will issue an error message upon
6124 encountering an @code{init_priority} attribute.
6125 @end defmac
6126
6127 @hook TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS
6128
6129 @hook TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR
6130
6131 @hook TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR
6132
6133 If @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is true, the initialization routine
6134 generated for the generated object file will have static linkage.
6135
6136 If your system uses @command{collect2} as the means of processing
6137 constructors, then that program normally uses @command{nm} to scan
6138 an object file for constructor functions to be called.
6139
6140 On certain kinds of systems, you can define this macro to make
6141 @command{collect2} work faster (and, in some cases, make it work at all):
6142
6143 @defmac OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
6144 Define this macro if the system uses COFF (Common Object File Format)
6145 object files, so that @command{collect2} can assume this format and scan
6146 object files directly for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
6147
6148 This macro is effective only in a native compiler; @command{collect2} as
6149 part of a cross compiler always uses @command{nm} for the target machine.
6150 @end defmac
6151
6152 @defmac REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
6153 Define this macro as a C string constant containing the file name to use
6154 to execute @command{nm}. The default is to search the path normally for
6155 @command{nm}.
6156 @end defmac
6157
6158 @defmac NM_FLAGS
6159 @command{collect2} calls @command{nm} to scan object files for static
6160 constructors and destructors and LTO info. By default, @option{-n} is
6161 passed. Define @code{NM_FLAGS} to a C string constant if other options
6162 are needed to get the same output format as GNU @command{nm -n}
6163 produces.
6164 @end defmac
6165
6166 If your system supports shared libraries and has a program to list the
6167 dynamic dependencies of a given library or executable, you can define
6168 these macros to enable support for running initialization and
6169 termination functions in shared libraries:
6170
6171 @defmac LDD_SUFFIX
6172 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the name of the program
6173 which lists dynamic dependencies, like @command{ldd} under SunOS 4.
6174 @end defmac
6175
6176 @defmac PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT (@var{ptr})
6177 Define this macro to be C code that extracts filenames from the output
6178 of the program denoted by @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. @var{ptr} is a variable
6179 of type @code{char *} that points to the beginning of a line of output
6180 from @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. If the line lists a dynamic dependency, the
6181 code must advance @var{ptr} to the beginning of the filename on that
6182 line. Otherwise, it must set @var{ptr} to @code{NULL}.
6183 @end defmac
6184
6185 @defmac SHLIB_SUFFIX
6186 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the default shared
6187 library extension of the target (e.g., @samp{".so"}). @command{collect2}
6188 strips version information after this suffix when generating global
6189 constructor and destructor names. This define is only needed on targets
6190 that use @command{collect2} to process constructors and destructors.
6191 @end defmac
6192
6193 @node Instruction Output
6194 @subsection Output of Assembler Instructions
6195
6196 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6197 This describes assembler instruction output.
6198
6199 @defmac REGISTER_NAMES
6200 A C initializer containing the assembler's names for the machine
6201 registers, each one as a C string constant. This is what translates
6202 register numbers in the compiler into assembler language.
6203 @end defmac
6204
6205 @defmac ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
6206 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a name
6207 and a register number. This macro defines additional names for hard
6208 registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in declarations to refer
6209 to registers using alternate names.
6210 @end defmac
6211
6212 @defmac OVERLAPPING_REGISTER_NAMES
6213 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a
6214 name, a register number and a count of the number of consecutive
6215 machine registers the name overlaps. This macro defines additional
6216 names for hard registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in
6217 declarations to refer to registers using alternate names. Unlike
6218 @code{ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES}, this macro should be used when the
6219 register name implies multiple underlying registers.
6220
6221 This macro should be used when it is important that a clobber in an
6222 @code{asm} statement clobbers all the underlying values implied by the
6223 register name. For example, on ARM, clobbering the double-precision
6224 VFP register ``d0'' implies clobbering both single-precision registers
6225 ``s0'' and ``s1''.
6226 @end defmac
6227
6228 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE (@var{stream}, @var{ptr})
6229 Define this macro if you are using an unusual assembler that
6230 requires different names for the machine instructions.
6231
6232 The definition is a C statement or statements which output an
6233 assembler instruction opcode to the stdio stream @var{stream}. The
6234 macro-operand @var{ptr} is a variable of type @code{char *} which
6235 points to the opcode name in its ``internal'' form---the form that is
6236 written in the machine description. The definition should output the
6237 opcode name to @var{stream}, performing any translation you desire, and
6238 increment the variable @var{ptr} to point at the end of the opcode
6239 so that it will not be output twice.
6240
6241 In fact, your macro definition may process less than the entire opcode
6242 name, or more than the opcode name; but if you want to process text
6243 that includes @samp{%}-sequences to substitute operands, you must take
6244 care of the substitution yourself. Just be sure to increment
6245 @var{ptr} over whatever text should not be output normally.
6246
6247 @findex recog_data.operand
6248 If you need to look at the operand values, they can be found as the
6249 elements of @code{recog_data.operand}.
6250
6251 If the macro definition does nothing, the instruction is output
6252 in the usual way.
6253 @end defmac
6254
6255 @defmac FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN (@var{insn}, @var{opvec}, @var{noperands})
6256 If defined, a C statement to be executed just prior to the output of
6257 assembler code for @var{insn}, to modify the extracted operands so
6258 they will be output differently.
6259
6260 Here the argument @var{opvec} is the vector containing the operands
6261 extracted from @var{insn}, and @var{noperands} is the number of
6262 elements of the vector which contain meaningful data for this insn.
6263 The contents of this vector are what will be used to convert the insn
6264 template into assembler code, so you can change the assembler output
6265 by changing the contents of the vector.
6266
6267 This macro is useful when various assembler syntaxes share a single
6268 file of instruction patterns; by defining this macro differently, you
6269 can cause a large class of instructions to be output differently (such
6270 as with rearranged operands). Naturally, variations in assembler
6271 syntax affecting individual insn patterns ought to be handled by
6272 writing conditional output routines in those patterns.
6273
6274 If this macro is not defined, it is equivalent to a null statement.
6275 @end defmac
6276
6277 @hook TARGET_ASM_FINAL_POSTSCAN_INSN
6278
6279 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND (@var{stream}, @var{x}, @var{code})
6280 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6281 assembler syntax for an instruction operand @var{x}. @var{x} is an
6282 RTL expression.
6283
6284 @var{code} is a value that can be used to specify one of several ways
6285 of printing the operand. It is used when identical operands must be
6286 printed differently depending on the context. @var{code} comes from
6287 the @samp{%} specification that was used to request printing of the
6288 operand. If the specification was just @samp{%@var{digit}} then
6289 @var{code} is 0; if the specification was @samp{%@var{ltr}
6290 @var{digit}} then @var{code} is the ASCII code for @var{ltr}.
6291
6292 @findex reg_names
6293 If @var{x} is a register, this macro should print the register's name.
6294 The names can be found in an array @code{reg_names} whose type is
6295 @code{char *[]}. @code{reg_names} is initialized from
6296 @code{REGISTER_NAMES}.
6297
6298 When the machine description has a specification @samp{%@var{punct}}
6299 (a @samp{%} followed by a punctuation character), this macro is called
6300 with a null pointer for @var{x} and the punctuation character for
6301 @var{code}.
6302 @end defmac
6303
6304 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P (@var{code})
6305 A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{code} is a valid
6306 punctuation character for use in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro. If
6307 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} is not defined, it means that no
6308 punctuation characters (except for the standard one, @samp{%}) are used
6309 in this way.
6310 @end defmac
6311
6312 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS (@var{stream}, @var{x})
6313 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6314 assembler syntax for an instruction operand that is a memory reference
6315 whose address is @var{x}. @var{x} is an RTL expression.
6316
6317 @cindex @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} usage
6318 On some machines, the syntax for a symbolic address depends on the
6319 section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the hook
6320 @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
6321 @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. @xref{Assembler
6322 Format}.
6323 @end defmac
6324
6325 @findex dbr_sequence_length
6326 @defmac DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND (@var{file})
6327 A C statement, to be executed after all slot-filler instructions have
6328 been output. If necessary, call @code{dbr_sequence_length} to
6329 determine the number of slots filled in a sequence (zero if not
6330 currently outputting a sequence), to decide how many no-ops to output,
6331 or whatever.
6332
6333 Don't define this macro if it has nothing to do, but it is helpful in
6334 reading assembly output if the extent of the delay sequence is made
6335 explicit (e.g.@: with white space).
6336 @end defmac
6337
6338 @findex final_sequence
6339 Note that output routines for instructions with delay slots must be
6340 prepared to deal with not being output as part of a sequence
6341 (i.e.@: when the scheduling pass is not run, or when no slot fillers could be
6342 found.) The variable @code{final_sequence} is null when not
6343 processing a sequence, otherwise it contains the @code{sequence} rtx
6344 being output.
6345
6346 @findex asm_fprintf
6347 @defmac REGISTER_PREFIX
6348 @defmacx LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6349 @defmacx USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6350 @defmacx IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6351 If defined, C string expressions to be used for the @samp{%R}, @samp{%L},
6352 @samp{%U}, and @samp{%I} options of @code{asm_fprintf} (see
6353 @file{final.c}). These are useful when a single @file{md} file must
6354 support multiple assembler formats. In that case, the various @file{tm.h}
6355 files can define these macros differently.
6356 @end defmac
6357
6358 @defmac ASM_FPRINTF_EXTENSIONS (@var{file}, @var{argptr}, @var{format})
6359 If defined this macro should expand to a series of @code{case}
6360 statements which will be parsed inside the @code{switch} statement of
6361 the @code{asm_fprintf} function. This allows targets to define extra
6362 printf formats which may useful when generating their assembler
6363 statements. Note that uppercase letters are reserved for future
6364 generic extensions to asm_fprintf, and so are not available to target
6365 specific code. The output file is given by the parameter @var{file}.
6366 The varargs input pointer is @var{argptr} and the rest of the format
6367 string, starting the character after the one that is being switched
6368 upon, is pointed to by @var{format}.
6369 @end defmac
6370
6371 @defmac ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6372 If your target supports multiple dialects of assembler language (such as
6373 different opcodes), define this macro as a C expression that gives the
6374 numeric index of the assembler language dialect to use, with zero as the
6375 first variant.
6376
6377 If this macro is defined, you may use constructs of the form
6378 @smallexample
6379 @samp{@{option0|option1|option2@dots{}@}}
6380 @end smallexample
6381 @noindent
6382 in the output templates of patterns (@pxref{Output Template}) or in the
6383 first argument of @code{asm_fprintf}. This construct outputs
6384 @samp{option0}, @samp{option1}, @samp{option2}, etc., if the value of
6385 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is zero, one, two, etc. Any special characters
6386 within these strings retain their usual meaning. If there are fewer
6387 alternatives within the braces than the value of
6388 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT}, the construct outputs nothing. If it's needed
6389 to print curly braces or @samp{|} character in assembler output directly,
6390 @samp{%@{}, @samp{%@}} and @samp{%|} can be used.
6391
6392 If you do not define this macro, the characters @samp{@{}, @samp{|} and
6393 @samp{@}} do not have any special meaning when used in templates or
6394 operands to @code{asm_fprintf}.
6395
6396 Define the macros @code{REGISTER_PREFIX}, @code{LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX},
6397 @code{USER_LABEL_PREFIX} and @code{IMMEDIATE_PREFIX} if you can express
6398 the variations in assembler language syntax with that mechanism. Define
6399 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} and use the @samp{@{option0|option1@}} syntax
6400 if the syntax variant are larger and involve such things as different
6401 opcodes or operand order.
6402 @end defmac
6403
6404 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6405 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6406 which will push hard register number @var{regno} onto the stack.
6407 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6408 profiling.
6409 @end defmac
6410
6411 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6412 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6413 which will pop hard register number @var{regno} off of the stack.
6414 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6415 profiling.
6416 @end defmac
6417
6418 @node Dispatch Tables
6419 @subsection Output of Dispatch Tables
6420
6421 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6422 This concerns dispatch tables.
6423
6424 @cindex dispatch table
6425 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{body}, @var{value}, @var{rel})
6426 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6427 pseudo-instruction to generate a difference between two labels.
6428 @var{value} and @var{rel} are the numbers of two internal labels. The
6429 definitions of these labels are output using
6430 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}, and they must be printed in the same
6431 way here. For example,
6432
6433 @smallexample
6434 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d-L%d\n",
6435 @var{value}, @var{rel})
6436 @end smallexample
6437
6438 You must provide this macro on machines where the addresses in a
6439 dispatch table are relative to the table's own address. If defined, GCC
6440 will also use this macro on all machines when producing PIC@.
6441 @var{body} is the body of the @code{ADDR_DIFF_VEC}; it is provided so that the
6442 mode and flags can be read.
6443 @end defmac
6444
6445 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
6446 This macro should be provided on machines where the addresses
6447 in a dispatch table are absolute.
6448
6449 The definition should be a C statement to output to the stdio stream
6450 @var{stream} an assembler pseudo-instruction to generate a reference to
6451 a label. @var{value} is the number of an internal label whose
6452 definition is output using @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
6453 For example,
6454
6455 @smallexample
6456 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d\n", @var{value})
6457 @end smallexample
6458 @end defmac
6459
6460 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6461 Define this if the label before a jump-table needs to be output
6462 specially. The first three arguments are the same as for
6463 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}; the fourth argument is the
6464 jump-table which follows (a @code{jump_table_data} containing an
6465 @code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec}).
6466
6467 This feature is used on system V to output a @code{swbeg} statement
6468 for the table.
6469
6470 If this macro is not defined, these labels are output with
6471 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
6472 @end defmac
6473
6474 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END (@var{stream}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6475 Define this if something special must be output at the end of a
6476 jump-table. The definition should be a C statement to be executed
6477 after the assembler code for the table is written. It should write
6478 the appropriate code to stdio stream @var{stream}. The argument
6479 @var{table} is the jump-table insn, and @var{num} is the label-number
6480 of the preceding label.
6481
6482 If this macro is not defined, nothing special is output at the end of
6483 the jump-table.
6484 @end defmac
6485
6486 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_UNWIND_LABEL
6487
6488 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_TABLE_LABEL
6489
6490 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_PERSONALITY
6491
6492 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT
6493
6494 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT_BEFORE_INSN
6495
6496 @node Exception Region Output
6497 @subsection Assembler Commands for Exception Regions
6498
6499 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6500
6501 This describes commands marking the start and the end of an exception
6502 region.
6503
6504 @defmac EH_FRAME_SECTION_NAME
6505 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing
6506 exception handling frame unwind information. If not defined, GCC will
6507 provide a default definition if the target supports named sections.
6508 @file{crtstuff.c} uses this macro to switch to the appropriate section.
6509
6510 You should define this symbol if your target supports DWARF 2 frame
6511 unwind information and the default definition does not work.
6512 @end defmac
6513
6514 @defmac EH_FRAME_THROUGH_COLLECT2
6515 If defined, DWARF 2 frame unwind information will identified by
6516 specially named labels. The collect2 process will locate these
6517 labels and generate code to register the frames.
6518
6519 This might be necessary, for instance, if the system linker will not
6520 place the eh_frames in-between the sentinals from @file{crtstuff.c},
6521 or if the system linker does garbage collection and sections cannot
6522 be marked as not to be collected.
6523 @end defmac
6524
6525 @defmac EH_TABLES_CAN_BE_READ_ONLY
6526 Define this macro to 1 if your target is such that no frame unwind
6527 information encoding used with non-PIC code will ever require a
6528 runtime relocation, but the linker may not support merging read-only
6529 and read-write sections into a single read-write section.
6530 @end defmac
6531
6532 @defmac MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6533 An rtx used to mask the return address found via @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX}, so
6534 that it does not contain any extraneous set bits in it.
6535 @end defmac
6536
6537 @defmac DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6538 Define this macro to 0 if your target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6539 information, but it does not yet work with exception handling.
6540 Otherwise, if your target supports this information (if it defines
6541 @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and @code{OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF}),
6542 GCC will provide a default definition of 1.
6543 @end defmac
6544
6545 @hook TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO
6546 This hook defines the mechanism that will be used for exception handling
6547 by the target. If the target has ABI specified unwind tables, the hook
6548 should return @code{UI_TARGET}. If the target is to use the
6549 @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling scheme, the hook
6550 should return @code{UI_SJLJ}. If the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6551 information, the hook should return @code{UI_DWARF2}.
6552
6553 A target may, if exceptions are disabled, choose to return @code{UI_NONE}.
6554 This may end up simplifying other parts of target-specific code. The
6555 default implementation of this hook never returns @code{UI_NONE}.
6556
6557 Note that the value returned by this hook should be constant. It should
6558 not depend on anything except the command-line switches described by
6559 @var{opts}. In particular, the
6560 setting @code{UI_SJLJ} must be fixed at compiler start-up as C pre-processor
6561 macros and builtin functions related to exception handling are set up
6562 depending on this setting.
6563
6564 The default implementation of the hook first honors the
6565 @option{--enable-sjlj-exceptions} configure option, then
6566 @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO}, and finally defaults to @code{UI_SJLJ}. If
6567 @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO} depends on command-line options, the target
6568 must define this hook so that @var{opts} is used correctly.
6569 @end deftypefn
6570
6571 @hook TARGET_UNWIND_TABLES_DEFAULT
6572 This variable should be set to @code{true} if the target ABI requires unwinding
6573 tables even when exceptions are not used. It must not be modified by
6574 command-line option processing.
6575 @end deftypevr
6576
6577 @defmac DONT_USE_BUILTIN_SETJMP
6578 Define this macro to 1 if the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based scheme
6579 should use the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp} functions from the C library
6580 instead of the @code{__builtin_setjmp}/@code{__builtin_longjmp} machinery.
6581 @end defmac
6582
6583 @defmac JMP_BUF_SIZE
6584 This macro has no effect unless @code{DONT_USE_BUILTIN_SETJMP} is also
6585 defined. Define this macro if the default size of @code{jmp_buf} buffer
6586 for the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling mechanism
6587 is not large enough, or if it is much too large.
6588 The default size is @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER * sizeof(void *)}.
6589 @end defmac
6590
6591 @defmac DWARF_CIE_DATA_ALIGNMENT
6592 This macro need only be defined if the target might save registers in the
6593 function prologue at an offset to the stack pointer that is not aligned to
6594 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. The definition should be the negative minimum
6595 alignment if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is true, and the positive
6596 minimum alignment otherwise. @xref{SDB and DWARF}. Only applicable if
6597 the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind information.
6598 @end defmac
6599
6600 @hook TARGET_TERMINATE_DW2_EH_FRAME_INFO
6601
6602 @hook TARGET_DWARF_REGISTER_SPAN
6603
6604 @hook TARGET_DWARF_FRAME_REG_MODE
6605
6606 @hook TARGET_INIT_DWARF_REG_SIZES_EXTRA
6607
6608 @hook TARGET_ASM_TTYPE
6609
6610 @hook TARGET_ARM_EABI_UNWINDER
6611
6612 @node Alignment Output
6613 @subsection Assembler Commands for Alignment
6614
6615 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6616 This describes commands for alignment.
6617
6618 @defmac JUMP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6619 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which is
6620 a common destination of jumps and has no fallthru incoming edge.
6621
6622 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6623 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6624 define the macro.
6625
6626 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6627 to set the variable @var{align_jumps} in the target's
6628 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6629 selection in @var{align_jumps} in a @code{JUMP_ALIGN} implementation.
6630 @end defmac
6631
6632 @hook TARGET_ASM_JUMP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6633
6634 @defmac LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER (@var{label})
6635 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6636 a @code{BARRIER}.
6637
6638 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6639 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6640 define the macro.
6641 @end defmac
6642
6643 @hook TARGET_ASM_LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER_MAX_SKIP
6644
6645 @defmac LOOP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6646 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label} that heads
6647 a frequently executed basic block (usually the header of a loop).
6648
6649 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6650 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6651 define the macro.
6652
6653 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6654 to set the variable @code{align_loops} in the target's
6655 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6656 selection in @code{align_loops} in a @code{LOOP_ALIGN} implementation.
6657 @end defmac
6658
6659 @hook TARGET_ASM_LOOP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6660
6661 @defmac LABEL_ALIGN (@var{label})
6662 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}.
6663 If @code{LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER} / @code{LOOP_ALIGN} specify a different alignment,
6664 the maximum of the specified values is used.
6665
6666 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6667 to set the variable @code{align_labels} in the target's
6668 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6669 selection in @code{align_labels} in a @code{LABEL_ALIGN} implementation.
6670 @end defmac
6671
6672 @hook TARGET_ASM_LABEL_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6673
6674 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP (@var{stream}, @var{nbytes})
6675 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6676 instruction to advance the location counter by @var{nbytes} bytes.
6677 Those bytes should be zero when loaded. @var{nbytes} will be a C
6678 expression of type @code{unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT}.
6679 @end defmac
6680
6681 @defmac ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6682 Define this macro if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP} should not be used in the
6683 text section because it fails to put zeros in the bytes that are skipped.
6684 This is true on many Unix systems, where the pseudo--op to skip bytes
6685 produces no-op instructions rather than zeros when used in the text
6686 section.
6687 @end defmac
6688
6689 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6690 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6691 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6692 @var{power} bytes. @var{power} will be a C expression of type @code{int}.
6693 @end defmac
6694
6695 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN_WITH_NOP (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6696 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN}, except that the ``nop'' instruction is used
6697 for padding, if necessary.
6698 @end defmac
6699
6700 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power}, @var{max_skip})
6701 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6702 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6703 @var{power} bytes, but only if @var{max_skip} or fewer bytes are needed to
6704 satisfy the alignment request. @var{power} and @var{max_skip} will be
6705 a C expression of type @code{int}.
6706 @end defmac
6707
6708 @need 3000
6709 @node Debugging Info
6710 @section Controlling Debugging Information Format
6711
6712 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6713 This describes how to specify debugging information.
6714
6715 @menu
6716 * All Debuggers:: Macros that affect all debugging formats uniformly.
6717 * DBX Options:: Macros enabling specific options in DBX format.
6718 * DBX Hooks:: Hook macros for varying DBX format.
6719 * File Names and DBX:: Macros controlling output of file names in DBX format.
6720 * SDB and DWARF:: Macros for SDB (COFF) and DWARF formats.
6721 * VMS Debug:: Macros for VMS debug format.
6722 @end menu
6723
6724 @node All Debuggers
6725 @subsection Macros Affecting All Debugging Formats
6726
6727 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6728 These macros affect all debugging formats.
6729
6730 @defmac DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})
6731 A C expression that returns the DBX register number for the compiler
6732 register number @var{regno}. In the default macro provided, the value
6733 of this expression will be @var{regno} itself. But sometimes there are
6734 some registers that the compiler knows about and DBX does not, or vice
6735 versa. In such cases, some register may need to have one number in the
6736 compiler and another for DBX@.
6737
6738 If two registers have consecutive numbers inside GCC, and they can be
6739 used as a pair to hold a multiword value, then they @emph{must} have
6740 consecutive numbers after renumbering with @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER}.
6741 Otherwise, debuggers will be unable to access such a pair, because they
6742 expect register pairs to be consecutive in their own numbering scheme.
6743
6744 If you find yourself defining @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER} in way that
6745 does not preserve register pairs, then what you must do instead is
6746 redefine the actual register numbering scheme.
6747 @end defmac
6748
6749 @defmac DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET (@var{x})
6750 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an automatic
6751 variable having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The default
6752 computation assumes that @var{x} is based on the frame-pointer and
6753 gives the offset from the frame-pointer. This is required for targets
6754 that produce debugging output for DBX or COFF-style debugging output
6755 for SDB and allow the frame-pointer to be eliminated when the
6756 @option{-g} options is used.
6757 @end defmac
6758
6759 @defmac DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET (@var{offset}, @var{x})
6760 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an argument
6761 having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The nominal offset is
6762 @var{offset}.
6763 @end defmac
6764
6765 @defmac PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
6766 A C expression that returns the type of debugging output GCC should
6767 produce when the user specifies just @option{-g}. Define
6768 this if you have arranged for GCC to support more than one format of
6769 debugging output. Currently, the allowable values are @code{DBX_DEBUG},
6770 @code{SDB_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF2_DEBUG},
6771 @code{XCOFF_DEBUG}, @code{VMS_DEBUG}, and @code{VMS_AND_DWARF2_DEBUG}.
6772
6773 When the user specifies @option{-ggdb}, GCC normally also uses the
6774 value of this macro to select the debugging output format, but with two
6775 exceptions. If @code{DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO} is defined, GCC uses the
6776 value @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}. Otherwise, if @code{DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO} is
6777 defined, GCC uses @code{DBX_DEBUG}.
6778
6779 The value of this macro only affects the default debugging output; the
6780 user can always get a specific type of output by using @option{-gstabs},
6781 @option{-gcoff}, @option{-gdwarf-2}, @option{-gxcoff}, or @option{-gvms}.
6782 @end defmac
6783
6784 @node DBX Options
6785 @subsection Specific Options for DBX Output
6786
6787 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6788 These are specific options for DBX output.
6789
6790 @defmac DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
6791 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for DBX
6792 in response to the @option{-g} option.
6793 @end defmac
6794
6795 @defmac XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6796 Define this macro if GCC should produce XCOFF format debugging output
6797 in response to the @option{-g} option. This is a variant of DBX format.
6798 @end defmac
6799
6800 @defmac DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6801 Define this macro to control whether GCC should by default generate
6802 GDB's extended version of DBX debugging information (assuming DBX-format
6803 debugging information is enabled at all). If you don't define the
6804 macro, the default is 1: always generate the extended information
6805 if there is any occasion to.
6806 @end defmac
6807
6808 @defmac DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6809 Define this macro if all @code{.stabs} commands should be output while
6810 in the text section.
6811 @end defmac
6812
6813 @defmac ASM_STABS_OP
6814 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6815 use instead of @code{"\t.stabs\t"} to define an ordinary debugging symbol.
6816 If you don't define this macro, @code{"\t.stabs\t"} is used. This macro
6817 applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6818 @end defmac
6819
6820 @defmac ASM_STABD_OP
6821 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6822 use instead of @code{"\t.stabd\t"} to define a debugging symbol whose
6823 value is the current location. If you don't define this macro,
6824 @code{"\t.stabd\t"} is used. This macro applies only to DBX debugging
6825 information format.
6826 @end defmac
6827
6828 @defmac ASM_STABN_OP
6829 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6830 use instead of @code{"\t.stabn\t"} to define a debugging symbol with no
6831 name. If you don't define this macro, @code{"\t.stabn\t"} is used. This
6832 macro applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6833 @end defmac
6834
6835 @defmac DBX_NO_XREFS
6836 Define this macro if DBX on your system does not support the construct
6837 @samp{xs@var{tagname}}. On some systems, this construct is used to
6838 describe a forward reference to a structure named @var{tagname}.
6839 On other systems, this construct is not supported at all.
6840 @end defmac
6841
6842 @defmac DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6843 A symbol name in DBX-format debugging information is normally
6844 continued (split into two separate @code{.stabs} directives) when it
6845 exceeds a certain length (by default, 80 characters). On some
6846 operating systems, DBX requires this splitting; on others, splitting
6847 must not be done. You can inhibit splitting by defining this macro
6848 with the value zero. You can override the default splitting-length by
6849 defining this macro as an expression for the length you desire.
6850 @end defmac
6851
6852 @defmac DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6853 Normally continuation is indicated by adding a @samp{\} character to
6854 the end of a @code{.stabs} string when a continuation follows. To use
6855 a different character instead, define this macro as a character
6856 constant for the character you want to use. Do not define this macro
6857 if backslash is correct for your system.
6858 @end defmac
6859
6860 @defmac DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6861 Define this macro if it is necessary to go to the data section before
6862 outputting the @samp{.stabs} pseudo-op for a non-global static
6863 variable.
6864 @end defmac
6865
6866 @defmac DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6867 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6868 for a typedef. The default is @code{N_LSYM}.
6869 @end defmac
6870
6871 @defmac DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6872 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6873 for a static variable located in the text section. DBX format does not
6874 provide any ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_FUN}.
6875 @end defmac
6876
6877 @defmac DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6878 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6879 for a parameter passed in registers. DBX format does not provide any
6880 ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_RSYM}.
6881 @end defmac
6882
6883 @defmac DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6884 The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a parameter
6885 passed in registers. DBX format does not customarily provide any way to
6886 do this. The default is @code{'P'}.
6887 @end defmac
6888
6889 @defmac DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6890 Define this macro if the DBX information for a function and its
6891 arguments should precede the assembler code for the function. Normally,
6892 in DBX format, the debugging information entirely follows the assembler
6893 code.
6894 @end defmac
6895
6896 @defmac DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6897 Define this macro, with value 1, if the value of a symbol describing
6898 the scope of a block (@code{N_LBRAC} or @code{N_RBRAC}) should be
6899 relative to the start of the enclosing function. Normally, GCC uses
6900 an absolute address.
6901 @end defmac
6902
6903 @defmac DBX_LINES_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6904 Define this macro, with value 1, if the value of a symbol indicating
6905 the current line number (@code{N_SLINE}) should be relative to the
6906 start of the enclosing function. Normally, GCC uses an absolute address.
6907 @end defmac
6908
6909 @defmac DBX_USE_BINCL
6910 Define this macro if GCC should generate @code{N_BINCL} and
6911 @code{N_EINCL} stabs for included header files, as on Sun systems. This
6912 macro also directs GCC to output a type number as a pair of a file
6913 number and a type number within the file. Normally, GCC does not
6914 generate @code{N_BINCL} or @code{N_EINCL} stabs, and it outputs a single
6915 number for a type number.
6916 @end defmac
6917
6918 @node DBX Hooks
6919 @subsection Open-Ended Hooks for DBX Format
6920
6921 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6922 These are hooks for DBX format.
6923
6924 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line}, @var{counter})
6925 A C statement to output DBX debugging information before code for line
6926 number @var{line} of the current source file to the stdio stream
6927 @var{stream}. @var{counter} is the number of time the macro was
6928 invoked, including the current invocation; it is intended to generate
6929 unique labels in the assembly output.
6930
6931 This macro should not be defined if the default output is correct, or
6932 if it can be made correct by defining @code{DBX_LINES_FUNCTION_RELATIVE}.
6933 @end defmac
6934
6935 @defmac NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
6936 Some stabs encapsulation formats (in particular ECOFF), cannot handle the
6937 @code{.stabs "",N_FUN,,0,0,Lscope-function-1} gdb dbx extension construct.
6938 On those machines, define this macro to turn this feature off without
6939 disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6940 @end defmac
6941
6942 @defmac NO_DBX_BNSYM_ENSYM
6943 Some assemblers cannot handle the @code{.stabd BNSYM/ENSYM,0,0} gdb dbx
6944 extension construct. On those machines, define this macro to turn this
6945 feature off without disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6946 @end defmac
6947
6948 @node File Names and DBX
6949 @subsection File Names in DBX Format
6950
6951 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6952 This describes file names in DBX format.
6953
6954 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6955 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6956 @var{stream}, which indicates that file @var{name} is the main source
6957 file---the file specified as the input file for compilation.
6958 This macro is called only once, at the beginning of compilation.
6959
6960 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6961 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6962
6963 It may be necessary to refer to a label equal to the beginning of the
6964 text section. You can use @samp{assemble_name (stream, ltext_label_name)}
6965 to do so. If you do this, you must also set the variable
6966 @var{used_ltext_label_name} to @code{true}.
6967 @end defmac
6968
6969 @defmac NO_DBX_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY
6970 Define this macro, with value 1, if GCC should not emit an indication
6971 of the current directory for compilation and current source language at
6972 the beginning of the file.
6973 @end defmac
6974
6975 @defmac NO_DBX_GCC_MARKER
6976 Define this macro, with value 1, if GCC should not emit an indication
6977 that this object file was compiled by GCC@. The default is to emit
6978 an @code{N_OPT} stab at the beginning of every source file, with
6979 @samp{gcc2_compiled.} for the string and value 0.
6980 @end defmac
6981
6982 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6983 A C statement to output DBX debugging information at the end of
6984 compilation of the main source file @var{name}. Output should be
6985 written to the stdio stream @var{stream}.
6986
6987 If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output at the end
6988 of compilation, which is correct for most machines.
6989 @end defmac
6990
6991 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_NULL_N_SO_AT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END
6992 Define this macro @emph{instead of} defining
6993 @code{DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END}, if what needs to be output at
6994 the end of compilation is an @code{N_SO} stab with an empty string,
6995 whose value is the highest absolute text address in the file.
6996 @end defmac
6997
6998 @need 2000
6999 @node SDB and DWARF
7000 @subsection Macros for SDB and DWARF Output
7001
7002 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7003 Here are macros for SDB and DWARF output.
7004
7005 @defmac SDB_DEBUGGING_INFO
7006 Define this macro to 1 if GCC should produce COFF-style debugging output
7007 for SDB in response to the @option{-g} option.
7008 @end defmac
7009
7010 @defmac DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
7011 Define this macro if GCC should produce dwarf version 2 format
7012 debugging output in response to the @option{-g} option.
7013
7014 @hook TARGET_DWARF_CALLING_CONVENTION
7015
7016 To support optional call frame debugging information, you must also
7017 define @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either set
7018 @code{RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P} on the prologue insns if you use RTL for the
7019 prologue, or call @code{dwarf2out_def_cfa} and @code{dwarf2out_reg_save}
7020 as appropriate from @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} if you don't.
7021 @end defmac
7022
7023 @defmac DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
7024 Define this macro to a nonzero value if GCC should always output
7025 Dwarf 2 frame information. If @code{TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO}
7026 (@pxref{Exception Region Output}) returns @code{UI_DWARF2}, and
7027 exceptions are enabled, GCC will output this information not matter
7028 how you define @code{DWARF2_FRAME_INFO}.
7029 @end defmac
7030
7031 @hook TARGET_DEBUG_UNWIND_INFO
7032
7033 @defmac DWARF2_ASM_LINE_DEBUG_INFO
7034 Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the assembler can generate Dwarf 2
7035 line debug info sections. This will result in much more compact line number
7036 tables, and hence is desirable if it works.
7037 @end defmac
7038
7039 @hook TARGET_WANT_DEBUG_PUB_SECTIONS
7040
7041 @hook TARGET_FORCE_AT_COMP_DIR
7042
7043 @hook TARGET_DELAY_SCHED2
7044
7045 @hook TARGET_DELAY_VARTRACK
7046
7047 @hook TARGET_NO_REGISTER_ALLOCATION
7048
7049 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
7050 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
7051 @var{lab1} minus @var{lab2}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
7052 @end defmac
7053
7054 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_VMS_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
7055 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
7056 between the two given labels in system defined units, e.g. instruction
7057 slots on IA64 VMS, using an integer of the given size.
7058 @end defmac
7059
7060 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_OFFSET (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label}, @var{section})
7061 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a
7062 section-relative reference to the given @var{label}, using an integer of the
7063 given @var{size}. The label is known to be defined in the given @var{section}.
7064 @end defmac
7065
7066 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_PCREL (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label})
7067 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a self-relative
7068 reference to the given @var{label}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
7069 @end defmac
7070
7071 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DATAREL (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label})
7072 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a reference to the
7073 given @var{label} relative to the dbase, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
7074 @end defmac
7075
7076 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_TABLE_REF (@var{label})
7077 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a reference to
7078 the DWARF table identifier @var{label} from the current section. This
7079 is used on some systems to avoid garbage collecting a DWARF table which
7080 is referenced by a function.
7081 @end defmac
7082
7083 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DTPREL
7084
7085 @defmac PUT_SDB_@dots{}
7086 Define these macros to override the assembler syntax for the special
7087 SDB assembler directives. See @file{sdbout.c} for a list of these
7088 macros and their arguments. If the standard syntax is used, you need
7089 not define them yourself.
7090 @end defmac
7091
7092 @defmac SDB_DELIM
7093 Some assemblers do not support a semicolon as a delimiter, even between
7094 SDB assembler directives. In that case, define this macro to be the
7095 delimiter to use (usually @samp{\n}). It is not necessary to define
7096 a new set of @code{PUT_SDB_@var{op}} macros if this is the only change
7097 required.
7098 @end defmac
7099
7100 @defmac SDB_ALLOW_UNKNOWN_REFERENCES
7101 Define this macro to allow references to unknown structure,
7102 union, or enumeration tags to be emitted. Standard COFF does not
7103 allow handling of unknown references, MIPS ECOFF has support for
7104 it.
7105 @end defmac
7106
7107 @defmac SDB_ALLOW_FORWARD_REFERENCES
7108 Define this macro to allow references to structure, union, or
7109 enumeration tags that have not yet been seen to be handled. Some
7110 assemblers choke if forward tags are used, while some require it.
7111 @end defmac
7112
7113 @defmac SDB_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line})
7114 A C statement to output SDB debugging information before code for line
7115 number @var{line} of the current source file to the stdio stream
7116 @var{stream}. The default is to emit an @code{.ln} directive.
7117 @end defmac
7118
7119 @need 2000
7120 @node VMS Debug
7121 @subsection Macros for VMS Debug Format
7122
7123 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7124 Here are macros for VMS debug format.
7125
7126 @defmac VMS_DEBUGGING_INFO
7127 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for VMS
7128 in response to the @option{-g} option. The default behavior for VMS
7129 is to generate minimal debug info for a traceback in the absence of
7130 @option{-g} unless explicitly overridden with @option{-g0}. This
7131 behavior is controlled by @code{TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION} and
7132 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}.
7133 @end defmac
7134
7135 @node Floating Point
7136 @section Cross Compilation and Floating Point
7137 @cindex cross compilation and floating point
7138 @cindex floating point and cross compilation
7139
7140 While all modern machines use twos-complement representation for integers,
7141 there are a variety of representations for floating point numbers. This
7142 means that in a cross-compiler the representation of floating point numbers
7143 in the compiled program may be different from that used in the machine
7144 doing the compilation.
7145
7146 Because different representation systems may offer different amounts of
7147 range and precision, all floating point constants must be represented in
7148 the target machine's format. Therefore, the cross compiler cannot
7149 safely use the host machine's floating point arithmetic; it must emulate
7150 the target's arithmetic. To ensure consistency, GCC always uses
7151 emulation to work with floating point values, even when the host and
7152 target floating point formats are identical.
7153
7154 The following macros are provided by @file{real.h} for the compiler to
7155 use. All parts of the compiler which generate or optimize
7156 floating-point calculations must use these macros. They may evaluate
7157 their operands more than once, so operands must not have side effects.
7158
7159 @defmac REAL_VALUE_TYPE
7160 The C data type to be used to hold a floating point value in the target
7161 machine's format. Typically this is a @code{struct} containing an
7162 array of @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}, but all code should treat it as an opaque
7163 quantity.
7164 @end defmac
7165
7166 @deftypefn Macro HOST_WIDE_INT REAL_VALUE_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7167 Truncates @var{x} to a signed integer, rounding toward zero.
7168 @end deftypefn
7169
7170 @deftypefn Macro {unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT} REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7171 Truncates @var{x} to an unsigned integer, rounding toward zero. If
7172 @var{x} is negative, returns zero.
7173 @end deftypefn
7174
7175 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ATOF (const char *@var{string}, machine_mode @var{mode})
7176 Converts @var{string} into a floating point number in the target machine's
7177 representation for mode @var{mode}. This routine can handle both
7178 decimal and hexadecimal floating point constants, using the syntax
7179 defined by the C language for both.
7180 @end deftypefn
7181
7182 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7183 Returns 1 if @var{x} is negative (including negative zero), 0 otherwise.
7184 @end deftypefn
7185
7186 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISINF (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7187 Determines whether @var{x} represents infinity (positive or negative).
7188 @end deftypefn
7189
7190 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISNAN (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7191 Determines whether @var{x} represents a ``NaN'' (not-a-number).
7192 @end deftypefn
7193
7194 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7195 Returns the negative of the floating point value @var{x}.
7196 @end deftypefn
7197
7198 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ABS (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7199 Returns the absolute value of @var{x}.
7200 @end deftypefn
7201
7202 @node Mode Switching
7203 @section Mode Switching Instructions
7204 @cindex mode switching
7205 The following macros control mode switching optimizations:
7206
7207 @defmac OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING (@var{entity})
7208 Define this macro if the port needs extra instructions inserted for mode
7209 switching in an optimizing compilation.
7210
7211 For an example, the SH4 can perform both single and double precision
7212 floating point operations, but to perform a single precision operation,
7213 the FPSCR PR bit has to be cleared, while for a double precision
7214 operation, this bit has to be set. Changing the PR bit requires a general
7215 purpose register as a scratch register, hence these FPSCR sets have to
7216 be inserted before reload, i.e.@: you can't put this into instruction emitting
7217 or @code{TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG}.
7218
7219 You can have multiple entities that are mode-switched, and select at run time
7220 which entities actually need it. @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING} should
7221 return nonzero for any @var{entity} that needs mode-switching.
7222 If you define this macro, you also have to define
7223 @code{NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING}, @code{TARGET_MODE_NEEDED},
7224 @code{TARGET_MODE_PRIORITY} and @code{TARGET_MODE_EMIT}.
7225 @code{TARGET_MODE_AFTER}, @code{TARGET_MODE_ENTRY}, and @code{TARGET_MODE_EXIT}
7226 are optional.
7227 @end defmac
7228
7229 @defmac NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING
7230 If you define @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING}, you have to define this as
7231 initializer for an array of integers. Each initializer element
7232 N refers to an entity that needs mode switching, and specifies the number
7233 of different modes that might need to be set for this entity.
7234 The position of the initializer in the initializer---starting counting at
7235 zero---determines the integer that is used to refer to the mode-switched
7236 entity in question.
7237 In macros that take mode arguments / yield a mode result, modes are
7238 represented as numbers 0 @dots{} N @minus{} 1. N is used to specify that no mode
7239 switch is needed / supplied.
7240 @end defmac
7241
7242 @hook TARGET_MODE_EMIT
7243
7244 @hook TARGET_MODE_NEEDED
7245
7246 @hook TARGET_MODE_AFTER
7247
7248 @hook TARGET_MODE_ENTRY
7249
7250 @hook TARGET_MODE_EXIT
7251
7252 @hook TARGET_MODE_PRIORITY
7253
7254 @node Target Attributes
7255 @section Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}
7256 @cindex target attributes
7257 @cindex machine attributes
7258 @cindex attributes, target-specific
7259
7260 Target-specific attributes may be defined for functions, data and types.
7261 These are described using the following target hooks; they also need to
7262 be documented in @file{extend.texi}.
7263
7264 @hook TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE
7265
7266 @hook TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TAKES_IDENTIFIER_P
7267
7268 @hook TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7269
7270 @hook TARGET_SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7271
7272 @hook TARGET_MERGE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7273
7274 @hook TARGET_MERGE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7275
7276 @hook TARGET_VALID_DLLIMPORT_ATTRIBUTE_P
7277
7278 @defmac TARGET_DECLSPEC
7279 Define this macro to a nonzero value if you want to treat
7280 @code{__declspec(X)} as equivalent to @code{__attribute((X))}. By
7281 default, this behavior is enabled only for targets that define
7282 @code{TARGET_DLLIMPORT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES}. The current implementation
7283 of @code{__declspec} is via a built-in macro, but you should not rely
7284 on this implementation detail.
7285 @end defmac
7286
7287 @hook TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES
7288
7289 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ATTRIBUTE_INLINABLE_P
7290
7291 @hook TARGET_OPTION_VALID_ATTRIBUTE_P
7292
7293 @hook TARGET_OPTION_SAVE
7294
7295 @hook TARGET_OPTION_RESTORE
7296
7297 @hook TARGET_OPTION_POST_STREAM_IN
7298
7299 @hook TARGET_OPTION_PRINT
7300
7301 @hook TARGET_OPTION_PRAGMA_PARSE
7302
7303 @hook TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE
7304
7305 @hook TARGET_OPTION_FUNCTION_VERSIONS
7306
7307 @hook TARGET_CAN_INLINE_P
7308
7309 @hook TARGET_RELAYOUT_FUNCTION
7310
7311 @node Emulated TLS
7312 @section Emulating TLS
7313 @cindex Emulated TLS
7314
7315 For targets whose psABI does not provide Thread Local Storage via
7316 specific relocations and instruction sequences, an emulation layer is
7317 used. A set of target hooks allows this emulation layer to be
7318 configured for the requirements of a particular target. For instance
7319 the psABI may in fact specify TLS support in terms of an emulation
7320 layer.
7321
7322 The emulation layer works by creating a control object for every TLS
7323 object. To access the TLS object, a lookup function is provided
7324 which, when given the address of the control object, will return the
7325 address of the current thread's instance of the TLS object.
7326
7327 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_GET_ADDRESS
7328
7329 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_REGISTER_COMMON
7330
7331 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_SECTION
7332
7333 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_SECTION
7334
7335 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_PREFIX
7336
7337 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_PREFIX
7338
7339 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_FIELDS
7340
7341 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_INIT
7342
7343 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_ALIGN_FIXED
7344
7345 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_DEBUG_FORM_TLS_ADDRESS
7346
7347 @node MIPS Coprocessors
7348 @section Defining coprocessor specifics for MIPS targets.
7349 @cindex MIPS coprocessor-definition macros
7350
7351 The MIPS specification allows MIPS implementations to have as many as 4
7352 coprocessors, each with as many as 32 private registers. GCC supports
7353 accessing these registers and transferring values between the registers
7354 and memory using asm-ized variables. For example:
7355
7356 @smallexample
7357 register unsigned int cp0count asm ("c0r1");
7358 unsigned int d;
7359
7360 d = cp0count + 3;
7361 @end smallexample
7362
7363 (``c0r1'' is the default name of register 1 in coprocessor 0; alternate
7364 names may be added as described below, or the default names may be
7365 overridden entirely in @code{SUBTARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}.)
7366
7367 Coprocessor registers are assumed to be epilogue-used; sets to them will
7368 be preserved even if it does not appear that the register is used again
7369 later in the function.
7370
7371 Another note: according to the MIPS spec, coprocessor 1 (if present) is
7372 the FPU@. One accesses COP1 registers through standard mips
7373 floating-point support; they are not included in this mechanism.
7374
7375 @node PCH Target
7376 @section Parameters for Precompiled Header Validity Checking
7377 @cindex parameters, precompiled headers
7378
7379 @hook TARGET_GET_PCH_VALIDITY
7380
7381 @hook TARGET_PCH_VALID_P
7382
7383 @hook TARGET_CHECK_PCH_TARGET_FLAGS
7384
7385 @hook TARGET_PREPARE_PCH_SAVE
7386
7387 @node C++ ABI
7388 @section C++ ABI parameters
7389 @cindex parameters, c++ abi
7390
7391 @hook TARGET_CXX_GUARD_TYPE
7392
7393 @hook TARGET_CXX_GUARD_MASK_BIT
7394
7395 @hook TARGET_CXX_GET_COOKIE_SIZE
7396
7397 @hook TARGET_CXX_COOKIE_HAS_SIZE
7398
7399 @hook TARGET_CXX_IMPORT_EXPORT_CLASS
7400
7401 @hook TARGET_CXX_CDTOR_RETURNS_THIS
7402
7403 @hook TARGET_CXX_KEY_METHOD_MAY_BE_INLINE
7404
7405 @hook TARGET_CXX_DETERMINE_CLASS_DATA_VISIBILITY
7406
7407 @hook TARGET_CXX_CLASS_DATA_ALWAYS_COMDAT
7408
7409 @hook TARGET_CXX_LIBRARY_RTTI_COMDAT
7410
7411 @hook TARGET_CXX_USE_AEABI_ATEXIT
7412
7413 @hook TARGET_CXX_USE_ATEXIT_FOR_CXA_ATEXIT
7414
7415 @hook TARGET_CXX_ADJUST_CLASS_AT_DEFINITION
7416
7417 @hook TARGET_CXX_DECL_MANGLING_CONTEXT
7418
7419 @node Named Address Spaces
7420 @section Adding support for named address spaces
7421 @cindex named address spaces
7422
7423 The draft technical report of the ISO/IEC JTC1 S22 WG14 N1275
7424 standards committee, @cite{Programming Languages - C - Extensions to
7425 support embedded processors}, specifies a syntax for embedded
7426 processors to specify alternate address spaces. You can configure a
7427 GCC port to support section 5.1 of the draft report to add support for
7428 address spaces other than the default address space. These address
7429 spaces are new keywords that are similar to the @code{volatile} and
7430 @code{const} type attributes.
7431
7432 Pointers to named address spaces can have a different size than
7433 pointers to the generic address space.
7434
7435 For example, the SPU port uses the @code{__ea} address space to refer
7436 to memory in the host processor, rather than memory local to the SPU
7437 processor. Access to memory in the @code{__ea} address space involves
7438 issuing DMA operations to move data between the host processor and the
7439 local processor memory address space. Pointers in the @code{__ea}
7440 address space are either 32 bits or 64 bits based on the
7441 @option{-mea32} or @option{-mea64} switches (native SPU pointers are
7442 always 32 bits).
7443
7444 Internally, address spaces are represented as a small integer in the
7445 range 0 to 15 with address space 0 being reserved for the generic
7446 address space.
7447
7448 To register a named address space qualifier keyword with the C front end,
7449 the target may call the @code{c_register_addr_space} routine. For example,
7450 the SPU port uses the following to declare @code{__ea} as the keyword for
7451 named address space #1:
7452 @smallexample
7453 #define ADDR_SPACE_EA 1
7454 c_register_addr_space ("__ea", ADDR_SPACE_EA);
7455 @end smallexample
7456
7457 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_POINTER_MODE
7458
7459 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_ADDRESS_MODE
7460
7461 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_VALID_POINTER_MODE
7462
7463 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P
7464
7465 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
7466
7467 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_SUBSET_P
7468
7469 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_ZERO_ADDRESS_VALID
7470
7471 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_CONVERT
7472
7473 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_DEBUG
7474
7475 @node Misc
7476 @section Miscellaneous Parameters
7477 @cindex parameters, miscellaneous
7478
7479 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7480 Here are several miscellaneous parameters.
7481
7482 @defmac HAS_LONG_COND_BRANCH
7483 Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
7484 has conditional branches that can span all of memory. It is used in
7485 conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
7486 blocks into separate sections of the executable. If this macro is
7487 set to false, gcc will convert any conditional branches that attempt
7488 to cross between sections into unconditional branches or indirect jumps.
7489 @end defmac
7490
7491 @defmac HAS_LONG_UNCOND_BRANCH
7492 Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
7493 has unconditional branches that can span all of memory. It is used in
7494 conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
7495 blocks into separate sections of the executable. If this macro is
7496 set to false, gcc will convert any unconditional branches that attempt
7497 to cross between sections into indirect jumps.
7498 @end defmac
7499
7500 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_MODE
7501 An alias for a machine mode name. This is the machine mode that
7502 elements of a jump-table should have.
7503 @end defmac
7504
7505 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE (@var{min_offset}, @var{max_offset}, @var{body})
7506 Optional: return the preferred mode for an @code{addr_diff_vec}
7507 when the minimum and maximum offset are known. If you define this,
7508 it enables extra code in branch shortening to deal with @code{addr_diff_vec}.
7509 To make this work, you also have to define @code{INSN_ALIGN} and
7510 make the alignment for @code{addr_diff_vec} explicit.
7511 The @var{body} argument is provided so that the offset_unsigned and scale
7512 flags can be updated.
7513 @end defmac
7514
7515 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
7516 Define this macro to be a C expression to indicate when jump-tables
7517 should contain relative addresses. You need not define this macro if
7518 jump-tables never contain relative addresses, or jump-tables should
7519 contain relative addresses only when @option{-fPIC} or @option{-fPIC}
7520 is in effect.
7521 @end defmac
7522
7523 @hook TARGET_CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
7524
7525 @defmac WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
7526 Define this macro to 1 if operations between registers with integral mode
7527 smaller than a word are always performed on the entire register.
7528 Most RISC machines have this property and most CISC machines do not.
7529 @end defmac
7530
7531 @defmac LOAD_EXTEND_OP (@var{mem_mode})
7532 Define this macro to be a C expression indicating when insns that read
7533 memory in @var{mem_mode}, an integral mode narrower than a word, set the
7534 bits outside of @var{mem_mode} to be either the sign-extension or the
7535 zero-extension of the data read. Return @code{SIGN_EXTEND} for values
7536 of @var{mem_mode} for which the
7537 insn sign-extends, @code{ZERO_EXTEND} for which it zero-extends, and
7538 @code{UNKNOWN} for other modes.
7539
7540 This macro is not called with @var{mem_mode} non-integral or with a width
7541 greater than or equal to @code{BITS_PER_WORD}, so you may return any
7542 value in this case. Do not define this macro if it would always return
7543 @code{UNKNOWN}. On machines where this macro is defined, you will normally
7544 define it as the constant @code{SIGN_EXTEND} or @code{ZERO_EXTEND}.
7545
7546 You may return a non-@code{UNKNOWN} value even if for some hard registers
7547 the sign extension is not performed, if for the @code{REGNO_REG_CLASS}
7548 of these hard registers @code{CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} returns nonzero
7549 when the @var{from} mode is @var{mem_mode} and the @var{to} mode is any
7550 integral mode larger than this but not larger than @code{word_mode}.
7551
7552 You must return @code{UNKNOWN} if for some hard registers that allow this
7553 mode, @code{CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} says that they cannot change to
7554 @code{word_mode}, but that they can change to another integral mode that
7555 is larger then @var{mem_mode} but still smaller than @code{word_mode}.
7556 @end defmac
7557
7558 @defmac SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7559 Define this macro to 1 if loading short immediate values into registers sign
7560 extends.
7561 @end defmac
7562
7563 @hook TARGET_MIN_DIVISIONS_FOR_RECIP_MUL
7564
7565 @defmac MOVE_MAX
7566 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7567 between memory and registers or between two memory locations.
7568 @end defmac
7569
7570 @defmac MAX_MOVE_MAX
7571 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7572 between memory and registers or between two memory locations. If this
7573 is undefined, the default is @code{MOVE_MAX}. Otherwise, it is the
7574 constant value that is the largest value that @code{MOVE_MAX} can have
7575 at run-time.
7576 @end defmac
7577
7578 @defmac SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7579 A C expression that is nonzero if on this machine the number of bits
7580 actually used for the count of a shift operation is equal to the number
7581 of bits needed to represent the size of the object being shifted. When
7582 this macro is nonzero, the compiler will assume that it is safe to omit
7583 a sign-extend, zero-extend, and certain bitwise `and' instructions that
7584 truncates the count of a shift operation. On machines that have
7585 instructions that act on bit-fields at variable positions, which may
7586 include `bit test' instructions, a nonzero @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED}
7587 also enables deletion of truncations of the values that serve as
7588 arguments to bit-field instructions.
7589
7590 If both types of instructions truncate the count (for shifts) and
7591 position (for bit-field operations), or if no variable-position bit-field
7592 instructions exist, you should define this macro.
7593
7594 However, on some machines, such as the 80386 and the 680x0, truncation
7595 only applies to shift operations and not the (real or pretended)
7596 bit-field operations. Define @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED} to be zero on
7597 such machines. Instead, add patterns to the @file{md} file that include
7598 the implied truncation of the shift instructions.
7599
7600 You need not define this macro if it would always have the value of zero.
7601 @end defmac
7602
7603 @anchor{TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK}
7604 @hook TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK
7605
7606 @defmac TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (@var{outprec}, @var{inprec})
7607 A C expression which is nonzero if on this machine it is safe to
7608 ``convert'' an integer of @var{inprec} bits to one of @var{outprec}
7609 bits (where @var{outprec} is smaller than @var{inprec}) by merely
7610 operating on it as if it had only @var{outprec} bits.
7611
7612 On many machines, this expression can be 1.
7613
7614 @c rearranged this, removed the phrase "it is reported that". this was
7615 @c to fix an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
7616 When @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} returns 1 for a pair of sizes for
7617 modes for which @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P} is 0, suboptimal code can result.
7618 If this is the case, making @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} return 0 in
7619 such cases may improve things.
7620 @end defmac
7621
7622 @hook TARGET_MODE_REP_EXTENDED
7623
7624 @defmac STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7625 A C expression describing the value returned by a comparison operator
7626 with an integral mode and stored by a store-flag instruction
7627 (@samp{cstore@var{mode}4}) when the condition is true. This description must
7628 apply to @emph{all} the @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} patterns and all the
7629 comparison operators whose results have a @code{MODE_INT} mode.
7630
7631 A value of 1 or @minus{}1 means that the instruction implementing the
7632 comparison operator returns exactly 1 or @minus{}1 when the comparison is true
7633 and 0 when the comparison is false. Otherwise, the value indicates
7634 which bits of the result are guaranteed to be 1 when the comparison is
7635 true. This value is interpreted in the mode of the comparison
7636 operation, which is given by the mode of the first operand in the
7637 @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} pattern. Either the low bit or the sign bit of
7638 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} be on. Presently, only those bits are used by
7639 the compiler.
7640
7641 If @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is neither 1 or @minus{}1, the compiler will
7642 generate code that depends only on the specified bits. It can also
7643 replace comparison operators with equivalent operations if they cause
7644 the required bits to be set, even if the remaining bits are undefined.
7645 For example, on a machine whose comparison operators return an
7646 @code{SImode} value and where @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is defined as
7647 @samp{0x80000000}, saying that just the sign bit is relevant, the
7648 expression
7649
7650 @smallexample
7651 (ne:SI (and:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{power-of-2})) (const_int 0))
7652 @end smallexample
7653
7654 @noindent
7655 can be converted to
7656
7657 @smallexample
7658 (ashift:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))
7659 @end smallexample
7660
7661 @noindent
7662 where @var{n} is the appropriate shift count to move the bit being
7663 tested into the sign bit.
7664
7665 There is no way to describe a machine that always sets the low-order bit
7666 for a true value, but does not guarantee the value of any other bits,
7667 but we do not know of any machine that has such an instruction. If you
7668 are trying to port GCC to such a machine, include an instruction to
7669 perform a logical-and of the result with 1 in the pattern for the
7670 comparison operators and let us know at @email{gcc@@gcc.gnu.org}.
7671
7672 Often, a machine will have multiple instructions that obtain a value
7673 from a comparison (or the condition codes). Here are rules to guide the
7674 choice of value for @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}, and hence the instructions
7675 to be used:
7676
7677 @itemize @bullet
7678 @item
7679 Use the shortest sequence that yields a valid definition for
7680 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}. It is more efficient for the compiler to
7681 ``normalize'' the value (convert it to, e.g., 1 or 0) than for the
7682 comparison operators to do so because there may be opportunities to
7683 combine the normalization with other operations.
7684
7685 @item
7686 For equal-length sequences, use a value of 1 or @minus{}1, with @minus{}1 being
7687 slightly preferred on machines with expensive jumps and 1 preferred on
7688 other machines.
7689
7690 @item
7691 As a second choice, choose a value of @samp{0x80000001} if instructions
7692 exist that set both the sign and low-order bits but do not define the
7693 others.
7694
7695 @item
7696 Otherwise, use a value of @samp{0x80000000}.
7697 @end itemize
7698
7699 Many machines can produce both the value chosen for
7700 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} and its negation in the same number of
7701 instructions. On those machines, you should also define a pattern for
7702 those cases, e.g., one matching
7703
7704 @smallexample
7705 (set @var{A} (neg:@var{m} (ne:@var{m} @var{B} @var{C})))
7706 @end smallexample
7707
7708 Some machines can also perform @code{and} or @code{plus} operations on
7709 condition code values with less instructions than the corresponding
7710 @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} insn followed by @code{and} or @code{plus}. On those
7711 machines, define the appropriate patterns. Use the names @code{incscc}
7712 and @code{decscc}, respectively, for the patterns which perform
7713 @code{plus} or @code{minus} operations on condition code values. See
7714 @file{rs6000.md} for some examples. The GNU Superoptimizer can be used to
7715 find such instruction sequences on other machines.
7716
7717 If this macro is not defined, the default value, 1, is used. You need
7718 not define @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} if the machine has no store-flag
7719 instructions, or if the value generated by these instructions is 1.
7720 @end defmac
7721
7722 @defmac FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7723 A C expression that gives a nonzero @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} value that is
7724 returned when comparison operators with floating-point results are true.
7725 Define this macro on machines that have comparison operations that return
7726 floating-point values. If there are no such operations, do not define
7727 this macro.
7728 @end defmac
7729
7730 @defmac VECTOR_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7731 A C expression that gives a rtx representing the nonzero true element
7732 for vector comparisons. The returned rtx should be valid for the inner
7733 mode of @var{mode} which is guaranteed to be a vector mode. Define
7734 this macro on machines that have vector comparison operations that
7735 return a vector result. If there are no such operations, do not define
7736 this macro. Typically, this macro is defined as @code{const1_rtx} or
7737 @code{constm1_rtx}. This macro may return @code{NULL_RTX} to prevent
7738 the compiler optimizing such vector comparison operations for the
7739 given mode.
7740 @end defmac
7741
7742 @defmac CLZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
7743 @defmacx CTZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
7744 A C expression that indicates whether the architecture defines a value
7745 for @code{clz} or @code{ctz} with a zero operand.
7746 A result of @code{0} indicates the value is undefined.
7747 If the value is defined for only the RTL expression, the macro should
7748 evaluate to @code{1}; if the value applies also to the corresponding optab
7749 entry (which is normally the case if it expands directly into
7750 the corresponding RTL), then the macro should evaluate to @code{2}.
7751 In the cases where the value is defined, @var{value} should be set to
7752 this value.
7753
7754 If this macro is not defined, the value of @code{clz} or
7755 @code{ctz} at zero is assumed to be undefined.
7756
7757 This macro must be defined if the target's expansion for @code{ffs}
7758 relies on a particular value to get correct results. Otherwise it
7759 is not necessary, though it may be used to optimize some corner cases, and
7760 to provide a default expansion for the @code{ffs} optab.
7761
7762 Note that regardless of this macro the ``definedness'' of @code{clz}
7763 and @code{ctz} at zero do @emph{not} extend to the builtin functions
7764 visible to the user. Thus one may be free to adjust the value at will
7765 to match the target expansion of these operations without fear of
7766 breaking the API@.
7767 @end defmac
7768
7769 @defmac Pmode
7770 An alias for the machine mode for pointers. On most machines, define
7771 this to be the integer mode corresponding to the width of a hardware
7772 pointer; @code{SImode} on 32-bit machine or @code{DImode} on 64-bit machines.
7773 On some machines you must define this to be one of the partial integer
7774 modes, such as @code{PSImode}.
7775
7776 The width of @code{Pmode} must be at least as large as the value of
7777 @code{POINTER_SIZE}. If it is not equal, you must define the macro
7778 @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED} to specify how pointers are extended
7779 to @code{Pmode}.
7780 @end defmac
7781
7782 @defmac FUNCTION_MODE
7783 An alias for the machine mode used for memory references to functions
7784 being called, in @code{call} RTL expressions. On most CISC machines,
7785 where an instruction can begin at any byte address, this should be
7786 @code{QImode}. On most RISC machines, where all instructions have fixed
7787 size and alignment, this should be a mode with the same size and alignment
7788 as the machine instruction words - typically @code{SImode} or @code{HImode}.
7789 @end defmac
7790
7791 @defmac STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS
7792 In normal operation, the preprocessor expands @code{__STDC__} to the
7793 constant 1, to signify that GCC conforms to ISO Standard C@. On some
7794 hosts, like Solaris, the system compiler uses a different convention,
7795 where @code{__STDC__} is normally 0, but is 1 if the user specifies
7796 strict conformance to the C Standard.
7797
7798 Defining @code{STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS} makes GNU CPP follows the host
7799 convention when processing system header files, but when processing user
7800 files @code{__STDC__} will always expand to 1.
7801 @end defmac
7802
7803 @hook TARGET_C_PREINCLUDE
7804
7805 @hook TARGET_CXX_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7806
7807 @defmac NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7808 Define this macro if the system header files support C++ as well as C@.
7809 This macro inhibits the usual method of using system header files in
7810 C++, which is to pretend that the file's contents are enclosed in
7811 @samp{extern "C" @{@dots{}@}}.
7812 @end defmac
7813
7814 @findex #pragma
7815 @findex pragma
7816 @defmac REGISTER_TARGET_PRAGMAS ()
7817 Define this macro if you want to implement any target-specific pragmas.
7818 If defined, it is a C expression which makes a series of calls to
7819 @code{c_register_pragma} or @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion}
7820 for each pragma. The macro may also do any
7821 setup required for the pragmas.
7822
7823 The primary reason to define this macro is to provide compatibility with
7824 other compilers for the same target. In general, we discourage
7825 definition of target-specific pragmas for GCC@.
7826
7827 If the pragma can be implemented by attributes then you should consider
7828 defining the target hook @samp{TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES} as well.
7829
7830 Preprocessor macros that appear on pragma lines are not expanded. All
7831 @samp{#pragma} directives that do not match any registered pragma are
7832 silently ignored, unless the user specifies @option{-Wunknown-pragmas}.
7833 @end defmac
7834
7835 @deftypefun void c_register_pragma (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
7836 @deftypefunx void c_register_pragma_with_expansion (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
7837
7838 Each call to @code{c_register_pragma} or
7839 @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} establishes one pragma. The
7840 @var{callback} routine will be called when the preprocessor encounters a
7841 pragma of the form
7842
7843 @smallexample
7844 #pragma [@var{space}] @var{name} @dots{}
7845 @end smallexample
7846
7847 @var{space} is the case-sensitive namespace of the pragma, or
7848 @code{NULL} to put the pragma in the global namespace. The callback
7849 routine receives @var{pfile} as its first argument, which can be passed
7850 on to cpplib's functions if necessary. You can lex tokens after the
7851 @var{name} by calling @code{pragma_lex}. Tokens that are not read by the
7852 callback will be silently ignored. The end of the line is indicated by
7853 a token of type @code{CPP_EOF}. Macro expansion occurs on the
7854 arguments of pragmas registered with
7855 @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} but not on the arguments of
7856 pragmas registered with @code{c_register_pragma}.
7857
7858 Note that the use of @code{pragma_lex} is specific to the C and C++
7859 compilers. It will not work in the Java or Fortran compilers, or any
7860 other language compilers for that matter. Thus if @code{pragma_lex} is going
7861 to be called from target-specific code, it must only be done so when
7862 building the C and C++ compilers. This can be done by defining the
7863 variables @code{c_target_objs} and @code{cxx_target_objs} in the
7864 target entry in the @file{config.gcc} file. These variables should name
7865 the target-specific, language-specific object file which contains the
7866 code that uses @code{pragma_lex}. Note it will also be necessary to add a
7867 rule to the makefile fragment pointed to by @code{tmake_file} that shows
7868 how to build this object file.
7869 @end deftypefun
7870
7871 @defmac HANDLE_PRAGMA_PACK_WITH_EXPANSION
7872 Define this macro if macros should be expanded in the
7873 arguments of @samp{#pragma pack}.
7874 @end defmac
7875
7876 @defmac TARGET_DEFAULT_PACK_STRUCT
7877 If your target requires a structure packing default other than 0 (meaning
7878 the machine default), define this macro to the necessary value (in bytes).
7879 This must be a value that would also be valid to use with
7880 @samp{#pragma pack()} (that is, a small power of two).
7881 @end defmac
7882
7883 @defmac DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7884 Define this macro to control use of the character @samp{$} in
7885 identifier names for the C family of languages. 0 means @samp{$} is
7886 not allowed by default; 1 means it is allowed. 1 is the default;
7887 there is no need to define this macro in that case.
7888 @end defmac
7889
7890 @defmac INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7891 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7892 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7893 even if they appear to use a resource set or clobbered in @var{insn}.
7894 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}; GCC knows that
7895 every @code{call_insn} has this behavior. On machines where some @code{insn}
7896 or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and hence has this behavior,
7897 you should define this macro.
7898
7899 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7900 @end defmac
7901
7902 @defmac INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7903 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7904 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7905 even if they appear to set or clobber a resource referenced in @var{insn}.
7906 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}. On machines where
7907 some @code{insn} or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and its operands
7908 are registers whose use is actually in the subroutine it calls, you should
7909 define this macro. Doing so allows the delay slot scheduler to move
7910 instructions which copy arguments into the argument registers into the delay
7911 slot of @var{insn}.
7912
7913 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7914 @end defmac
7915
7916 @defmac MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7917 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if, in some cases,
7918 global symbols from one translation unit may not be bound to undefined
7919 symbols in another translation unit without user intervention. For
7920 instance, under Microsoft Windows symbols must be explicitly imported
7921 from shared libraries (DLLs).
7922
7923 You need not define this macro if it would always evaluate to zero.
7924 @end defmac
7925
7926 @hook TARGET_MD_ASM_ADJUST
7927
7928 @defmac MATH_LIBRARY
7929 Define this macro as a C string constant for the linker argument to link
7930 in the system math library, minus the initial @samp{"-l"}, or
7931 @samp{""} if the target does not have a
7932 separate math library.
7933
7934 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"m"} is wrong.
7935 @end defmac
7936
7937 @defmac LIBRARY_PATH_ENV
7938 Define this macro as a C string constant for the environment variable that
7939 specifies where the linker should look for libraries.
7940
7941 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"LIBRARY_PATH"}
7942 is wrong.
7943 @end defmac
7944
7945 @defmac TARGET_POSIX_IO
7946 Define this macro if the target supports the following POSIX@ file
7947 functions, access, mkdir and file locking with fcntl / F_SETLKW@.
7948 Defining @code{TARGET_POSIX_IO} will enable the test coverage code
7949 to use file locking when exiting a program, which avoids race conditions
7950 if the program has forked. It will also create directories at run-time
7951 for cross-profiling.
7952 @end defmac
7953
7954 @defmac MAX_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTE
7955
7956 A C expression for the maximum number of instructions to execute via
7957 conditional execution instructions instead of a branch. A value of
7958 @code{BRANCH_COST}+1 is the default if the machine does not use cc0, and
7959 1 if it does use cc0.
7960 @end defmac
7961
7962 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
7963 Used if the target needs to perform machine-dependent modifications on the
7964 conditionals used for turning basic blocks into conditionally executed code.
7965 @var{ce_info} points to a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which
7966 contains information about the currently processed blocks. @var{true_expr}
7967 and @var{false_expr} are the tests that are used for converting the
7968 then-block and the else-block, respectively. Set either @var{true_expr} or
7969 @var{false_expr} to a null pointer if the tests cannot be converted.
7970 @end defmac
7971
7972 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_MULTIPLE_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{bb}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
7973 Like @code{IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS}, but used when converting more complicated
7974 if-statements into conditions combined by @code{and} and @code{or} operations.
7975 @var{bb} contains the basic block that contains the test that is currently
7976 being processed and about to be turned into a condition.
7977 @end defmac
7978
7979 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_INSN (@var{ce_info}, @var{pattern}, @var{insn})
7980 A C expression to modify the @var{PATTERN} of an @var{INSN} that is to
7981 be converted to conditional execution format. @var{ce_info} points to
7982 a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which contains information
7983 about the currently processed blocks.
7984 @end defmac
7985
7986 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_FINAL (@var{ce_info})
7987 A C expression to perform any final machine dependent modifications in
7988 converting code to conditional execution. The involved basic blocks
7989 can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7990 to by @var{ce_info}.
7991 @end defmac
7992
7993 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_CANCEL (@var{ce_info})
7994 A C expression to cancel any machine dependent modifications in
7995 converting code to conditional execution. The involved basic blocks
7996 can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7997 to by @var{ce_info}.
7998 @end defmac
7999
8000 @defmac IFCVT_MACHDEP_INIT (@var{ce_info})
8001 A C expression to initialize any machine specific data for if-conversion
8002 of the if-block in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
8003 to by @var{ce_info}.
8004 @end defmac
8005
8006 @hook TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG
8007
8008 @hook TARGET_INIT_BUILTINS
8009
8010 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_DECL
8011
8012 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN
8013
8014 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_CHKP_FUNCTION
8015 @hook TARGET_CHKP_BOUND_TYPE
8016 @hook TARGET_CHKP_BOUND_MODE
8017 @hook TARGET_CHKP_MAKE_BOUNDS_CONSTANT
8018 @hook TARGET_CHKP_INITIALIZE_BOUNDS
8019
8020 @hook TARGET_RESOLVE_OVERLOADED_BUILTIN
8021
8022 @hook TARGET_FOLD_BUILTIN
8023
8024 @hook TARGET_GIMPLE_FOLD_BUILTIN
8025
8026 @hook TARGET_COMPARE_VERSION_PRIORITY
8027
8028 @hook TARGET_GET_FUNCTION_VERSIONS_DISPATCHER
8029
8030 @hook TARGET_GENERATE_VERSION_DISPATCHER_BODY
8031
8032 @hook TARGET_CAN_USE_DOLOOP_P
8033
8034 @hook TARGET_INVALID_WITHIN_DOLOOP
8035
8036 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_COMBINED_INSN
8037
8038 @hook TARGET_CAN_FOLLOW_JUMP
8039
8040 @hook TARGET_COMMUTATIVE_P
8041
8042 @hook TARGET_ALLOCATE_INITIAL_VALUE
8043
8044 @hook TARGET_UNSPEC_MAY_TRAP_P
8045
8046 @hook TARGET_SET_CURRENT_FUNCTION
8047
8048 @defmac TARGET_OBJECT_SUFFIX
8049 Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix for object
8050 files on your target machine. If you do not define this macro, GCC will
8051 use @samp{.o} as the suffix for object files.
8052 @end defmac
8053
8054 @defmac TARGET_EXECUTABLE_SUFFIX
8055 Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix to be
8056 automatically added to executable files on your target machine. If you
8057 do not define this macro, GCC will use the null string as the suffix for
8058 executable files.
8059 @end defmac
8060
8061 @defmac COLLECT_EXPORT_LIST
8062 If defined, @code{collect2} will scan the individual object files
8063 specified on its command line and create an export list for the linker.
8064 Define this macro for systems like AIX, where the linker discards
8065 object files that are not referenced from @code{main} and uses export
8066 lists.
8067 @end defmac
8068
8069 @defmac MODIFY_JNI_METHOD_CALL (@var{mdecl})
8070 Define this macro to a C expression representing a variant of the
8071 method call @var{mdecl}, if Java Native Interface (JNI) methods
8072 must be invoked differently from other methods on your target.
8073 For example, on 32-bit Microsoft Windows, JNI methods must be invoked using
8074 the @code{stdcall} calling convention and this macro is then
8075 defined as this expression:
8076
8077 @smallexample
8078 build_type_attribute_variant (@var{mdecl},
8079 build_tree_list
8080 (get_identifier ("stdcall"),
8081 NULL))
8082 @end smallexample
8083 @end defmac
8084
8085 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_MODIFY_JUMPS_P
8086
8087 @hook TARGET_BRANCH_TARGET_REGISTER_CLASS
8088
8089 @hook TARGET_BRANCH_TARGET_REGISTER_CALLEE_SAVED
8090
8091 @hook TARGET_HAVE_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTION
8092
8093 @hook TARGET_GEN_CCMP_FIRST
8094
8095 @hook TARGET_GEN_CCMP_NEXT
8096
8097 @hook TARGET_LOOP_UNROLL_ADJUST
8098
8099 @defmac POWI_MAX_MULTS
8100 If defined, this macro is interpreted as a signed integer C expression
8101 that specifies the maximum number of floating point multiplications
8102 that should be emitted when expanding exponentiation by an integer
8103 constant inline. When this value is defined, exponentiation requiring
8104 more than this number of multiplications is implemented by calling the
8105 system library's @code{pow}, @code{powf} or @code{powl} routines.
8106 The default value places no upper bound on the multiplication count.
8107 @end defmac
8108
8109 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
8110 This target hook should register any extra include files for the
8111 target. The parameter @var{stdinc} indicates if normal include files
8112 are present. The parameter @var{sysroot} is the system root directory.
8113 The parameter @var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
8114 @end deftypefn
8115
8116 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_PRE_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
8117 This target hook should register any extra include files for the
8118 target before any standard headers. The parameter @var{stdinc}
8119 indicates if normal include files are present. The parameter
8120 @var{sysroot} is the system root directory. The parameter
8121 @var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
8122 @end deftypefn
8123
8124 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_OPTF (char *@var{path})
8125 This target hook should register special include paths for the target.
8126 The parameter @var{path} is the include to register. On Darwin
8127 systems, this is used for Framework includes, which have semantics
8128 that are different from @option{-I}.
8129 @end deftypefn
8130
8131 @defmac bool TARGET_USE_LOCAL_THUNK_ALIAS_P (tree @var{fndecl})
8132 This target macro returns @code{true} if it is safe to use a local alias
8133 for a virtual function @var{fndecl} when constructing thunks,
8134 @code{false} otherwise. By default, the macro returns @code{true} for all
8135 functions, if a target supports aliases (i.e.@: defines
8136 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF}), @code{false} otherwise,
8137 @end defmac
8138
8139 @defmac TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES
8140 If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
8141 target-specific format checking information for the @option{-Wformat}
8142 option. The default is to have no target-specific format checks.
8143 @end defmac
8144
8145 @defmac TARGET_N_FORMAT_TYPES
8146 If defined, this macro is the number of entries in
8147 @code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES}.
8148 @end defmac
8149
8150 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES
8151 If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
8152 target-specific format overrides for the @option{-Wformat} option. The
8153 default is to have no target-specific format overrides. If defined,
8154 @code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES} must be defined, too.
8155 @end defmac
8156
8157 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES_COUNT
8158 If defined, this macro specifies the number of entries in
8159 @code{TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES}.
8160 @end defmac
8161
8162 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_INIT
8163 If defined, this macro specifies the optional initialization
8164 routine for target specific customizations of the system printf
8165 and scanf formatter settings.
8166 @end defmac
8167
8168 @hook TARGET_INVALID_ARG_FOR_UNPROTOTYPED_FN
8169
8170 @hook TARGET_INVALID_CONVERSION
8171
8172 @hook TARGET_INVALID_UNARY_OP
8173
8174 @hook TARGET_INVALID_BINARY_OP
8175
8176 @hook TARGET_PROMOTED_TYPE
8177
8178 @hook TARGET_CONVERT_TO_TYPE
8179
8180 @defmac TARGET_USE_JCR_SECTION
8181 This macro determines whether to use the JCR section to register Java
8182 classes. By default, TARGET_USE_JCR_SECTION is defined to 1 if both
8183 SUPPORTS_WEAK and TARGET_HAVE_NAMED_SECTIONS are true, else 0.
8184 @end defmac
8185
8186 @defmac OBJC_JBLEN
8187 This macro determines the size of the objective C jump buffer for the
8188 NeXT runtime. By default, OBJC_JBLEN is defined to an innocuous value.
8189 @end defmac
8190
8191 @defmac LIBGCC2_UNWIND_ATTRIBUTE
8192 Define this macro if any target-specific attributes need to be attached
8193 to the functions in @file{libgcc} that provide low-level support for
8194 call stack unwinding. It is used in declarations in @file{unwind-generic.h}
8195 and the associated definitions of those functions.
8196 @end defmac
8197
8198 @hook TARGET_UPDATE_STACK_BOUNDARY
8199
8200 @hook TARGET_GET_DRAP_RTX
8201
8202 @hook TARGET_ALLOCATE_STACK_SLOTS_FOR_ARGS
8203
8204 @hook TARGET_CONST_ANCHOR
8205
8206 @hook TARGET_ASAN_SHADOW_OFFSET
8207
8208 @hook TARGET_MEMMODEL_CHECK
8209
8210 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_TEST_AND_SET_TRUEVAL
8211
8212 @hook TARGET_HAS_IFUNC_P
8213
8214 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_ALIGN_FOR_MODE
8215
8216 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_ASSIGN_EXPAND_FENV
8217
8218 @hook TARGET_RECORD_OFFLOAD_SYMBOL
8219
8220 @hook TARGET_OFFLOAD_OPTIONS
8221
8222 @defmac TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT
8223
8224 On older ports, large integers are stored in @code{CONST_DOUBLE} rtl
8225 objects. Newer ports define @code{TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT} to be nonzero
8226 to indicate that large integers are stored in
8227 @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} rtl objects. The @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} allows
8228 very large integer constants to be represented. @code{CONST_DOUBLE}
8229 is limited to twice the size of the host's @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}
8230 representation.
8231
8232 Converting a port mostly requires looking for the places where
8233 @code{CONST_DOUBLE}s are used with @code{VOIDmode} and replacing that
8234 code with code that accesses @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}s. @samp{"grep -i
8235 const_double"} at the port level gets you to 95% of the changes that
8236 need to be made. There are a few places that require a deeper look.
8237
8238 @itemize @bullet
8239 @item
8240 There is no equivalent to @code{hval} and @code{lval} for
8241 @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}s. This would be difficult to express in the md
8242 language since there are a variable number of elements.
8243
8244 Most ports only check that @code{hval} is either 0 or -1 to see if the
8245 value is small. As mentioned above, this will no longer be necessary
8246 since small constants are always @code{CONST_INT}. Of course there
8247 are still a few exceptions, the alpha's constraint used by the zap
8248 instruction certainly requires careful examination by C code.
8249 However, all the current code does is pass the hval and lval to C
8250 code, so evolving the c code to look at the @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} is
8251 not really a large change.
8252
8253 @item
8254 Because there is no standard template that ports use to materialize
8255 constants, there is likely to be some futzing that is unique to each
8256 port in this code.
8257
8258 @item
8259 The rtx costs may have to be adjusted to properly account for larger
8260 constants that are represented as @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}.
8261 @end itemize
8262
8263 All and all it does not take long to convert ports that the
8264 maintainer is familiar with.
8265
8266 @end defmac